Uploaded by Aakrish Bhutani

IGCSE Accounting all Paper 1s 2018-21

advertisement
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 6 3 6 9 2 5 2 6 1 1 *
0452/12
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
February/March 2018
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
DC (NH) 144914/1
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one
you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Harpreet is a credit customer of Suzanna. Harpreet’s account in Suzanna’s books shows a
credit balance.
How could the credit balance have arisen?
A
A cheque from Harpreet was dishonoured.
B
Harpreet has overpaid his account.
C
Interest was charged by Suzanna.
D
Suzanna offered a trade discount.
[1]
(b) The following is the subscriptions account of a club.
Subscriptions account
$
2017
2017
Jan 1
Dec 31
2018
Jan 1
Balance b/d
Income and
expenditure
Balance c/d
150
3000
50
3200
Balance b/d
60
Jan 1
Dec 31
2018
Jan 1
$
Balance b/d
Bank
Balance c/d
80
3060
60
3200
Balance b/d
50
Which statement is correct?
A
Subscriptions in advance at 1 January 2018 were $50.
B
Subscriptions in arrears at 1 January 2017 were $80.
C
Subscription income for the year was $3060.
D
Subscriptions received during the year were $3000.
[1]
(c) Why is it necessary for a manufacturing business to make an adjustment for work in progress
in its manufacturing account?
1
2
3
to calculate what is needed to complete production
to record all factory costs
to show only the cost of goods completed
A
1 and 2
B
1 only
C
2 and 3
D
3 only
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/12/F/M/18
3
(d) Narinder made a short-term loan to Seema. Narinder’s draft statement of financial position
showed this loan as a current liability.
What was the effect of this error?
A
current assets understated
B
current liabilities understated
C
non-current liabilities overstated
D
owner’s capital overstated
[1]
(e) On 1 February 2017 Katya’s fixtures and fittings had a net book value of $12 950. She
purchased fixtures, $2250, during the year. Depreciation for the year ended 31 January 2018
was $4900.
What was the net book value of fixtures and fittings on 31 January 2018?
(f)
A
$5800
B
$7150
C
$10 300
D
$15 600
[1]
The accounts of a business are prepared on the basis that the business will continue to
operate for the foreseeable future.
Which accounting principle is being applied?
A
accruals (matching)
B
consistency
C
going concern
D
realisation
[1]
(g) Which term in club or society accounts means the same as capital?
A
accumulated fund
B
appropriation account
C
balance at bank
D
surplus for the year
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
4
(h) A business provided the following information.
revenue
gross profit
profit for the year
$
290 000
90 000
70 000
What was the mark-up?
(i)
A
24.14%
B
31.03%
C
35.00%
D
45.00%
[1]
Financial statements must provide information in time for financial decisions to be made.
Which accounting objective is being described?
(j)
A
comparability
B
relevance
C
reliability
D
understandability
[1]
Which item would be recorded as a credit entry in a purchases ledger control account?
A
amounts paid to credit suppliers
B
contra with the sales ledger control account
C
discount received from credit suppliers
D
interest charged on late payment
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
5
2
Kumar supplies goods to Simran on credit. Some documents were exchanged between them
during August 2017.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table to name the person who issued each document. The first item has been
completed as an example.
document
name of person issuing the document
invoice
Kumar
debit note
credit note
statement of account
cheque
[4]
(b) State the purpose of a debit note.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State the book of prime (original) entry in which Kumar would record the credit note.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Name the ledger in which Kumar maintains Simran’s account.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Simran is a regular customer. Kumar allows Simran a discount for buying in bulk.
REQUIRED
(e) Name the type of discount offered by Kumar.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(f)
State where Kumar would record this discount.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
6
The following are details of the credit notes issued by Kumar in December 2017.
Date
Credit note
number
Customer
$
2017
Dec 3
Sam
C1015
295
12
Saira
C1016
103
31
Total for December
398
REQUIRED
(g) State where Kumar will post
(i)
the total of the credit notes for December
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
the individual credit notes
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
Kumar has received positive feedback about his customer service. No entry has been made in the
accounting records to reflect this success.
REQUIRED
(h) Name and explain the accounting principle Kumar has applied.
Name ........................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(i)
Complete the following to show the accounting equation.
equals
assets
minus
[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
7
(j)
Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) to indicate how each item affects the owner’s capital.
The first one has been completed as an example.
item
increase
decrease
capital introduced
drawings
profit for the year
[2]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
8
3
Nikita has a business with a financial year end of 31 January. On 1 February 2017 there was a
credit balance of $140 on the electricity expense account.
During the year ended 31 January 2018 the following payments were made relating to electricity.
2017
Mar 10
Jun 7
Sep 5
Dec 6
$
direct debit
direct debit
direct debit
direct debit
210
130
185
205
The cost of electricity for the three months ended 28 February 2018 was estimated to be $330.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the electricity expense account for the year ended 31 January 2018. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 February 2018.
Nikita
Electricity expense account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
[6]
(b) State what the balance brought down on 1 February 2018 on the electricity expense account
represents.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
9
(c) Name the section of the statement of financial position on 31 January 2018 in which the
balance on the electricity expense account was included.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Nikita also rents out some premises.
On 1 February 2017 the tenant owed $1250.
The following amounts for rent were received during the year.
$
2017
May 10
Oct 14
cash
cheque
2700
2800
On 31 January 2018 the tenant owed $1700.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the rent receivable account for the year ended 31 January 2018. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 February 2018.
Nikita
Rent receivable account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
[6]
(e) Name the section of the statement of financial position on 31 January 2018 in which the
balance on the rent receivable account was included.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
10
(f)
Insert the missing words and figures into the following extract from Nikita’s income statement
for the year ended 31 January 2018.
Nikita
Income Statement for the year ended 31 January 2018
$
$
$
Revenue
Less: returns
4 000
123 000
Cost of sales
8 000
Inventory at
Purchases
76 000
Goods for own use
2 000
Carriage inwards
1 200
Less: Inventory at
11 000
[8]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
11
Nikita’s brother, Sunil, provided the following information about his business at 31 January 2018.
Non-current assets
Inventory
Trade receivables
Bank
Trade payables
Long-term loan
$
89 350
6 800
12 500
1 010 debit
15 200
8 000
REQUIRED
(g) State what is measured by the current ratio.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(h) Calculate the current ratio for Sunil’s business at 31 January 2018. The calculation should be
correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(i)
Suggest two reasons why Nikita cannot compare her current ratio with that of Sunil.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(j)
Suggest two ways in which Nikita might improve her working capital position.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 30]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
12
4
Meena is a trader. On 31 December 2017 Meena’s cash book (bank columns) showed an
overdrawn balance of $2450. The balance on the bank statement at the same date was
$2623 debit. Meena checked the cash book against the bank statement and discovered the
following differences.
1
Cash sales, $362, paid into the bank on 31 December, did not appear on the bank statement.
2
Interest charged by the bank, $20, had not been recorded in the cash book.
3
A cheque for $94 from a customer, Anjana, had been paid into the bank but had been returned
as dishonoured.
4
The bank had received $140 by credit transfer from Rohan, a customer, which had been
omitted from the cash book.
5
Cheques totalling $198, issued by Meena, had not been presented for payment.
6
The bank had paid a standing order, $35, to a supplier on 30 December by mistake.
REQUIRED
(a) Update Meena’s cash book (bank columns) at 31 December 2017. Bring down the updated
balance on 1 January 2018.
Meena
Cash book (bank columns)
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
[5]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
13
(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 December 2017.
Meena
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 December 2017
$
$
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
[6]
(c) State the amount which will be shown as the bank balance in the statement of financial
position at 31 December 2017 and the section in which it will be shown.
Amount $ ..................................................................................................................................
Section of statement of financial position .............................................................................[2]
(d) State what is meant by a ‘dishonoured cheque’. Suggest two possible reasons why a cheque
might be dishonoured.
Meaning ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reasons ...................................................................................................................................
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
14
Meena maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The amount of the imprest is $200.
During the month of December Meena paid the following expenses from petty cash.
Stationery
Taxi fares
Office tea and biscuits
$
18
5
4
REQUIRED
(e) Explain the meaning of the ‘imprest system’.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(f)
State the double entry to record the reimbursement to the petty cash imprest on 1 January
2018.
debit entry
$
credit entry
$
[3]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
15
5
Eli and Sumit are in partnership.
Balances on the partners’ capital and current accounts on 1 November 2016 were:
Eli
Sumit
capital account
$
50 000
40 000
current account
$
4 500
debit 1 800 debit
REQUIRED
(a) Explain why each partner has both a current and a capital account.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State what the debit balance on Sumit’s current account on 1 November 2016 represents.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
The partnership agreement includes the following terms.
Annual salary to Eli
Interest on capital
Interest on drawings
Share of profits/losses
$7500
8% per annum
4%
Eli 3: Sumit 2
Additional information
1
Profit for the year ended 31 October 2017 was $12 500.
2
Additional capital, $5000, was introduced by Sumit on 1 May 2017.
3
Drawings for the year were Eli, $5000, Sumit, $6500.
REQUIRED
(c) Suggest one reason why Eli and Sumit are charged interest on drawings.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
16
(d) Prepare the partnership appropriation account for the year ended 31 October 2017.
Eli and Sumit
Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 October 2017
$
$
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
.............................................................................................
...................
...................
[7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
17
(e) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position of Eli and Sumit at 31 October 2017
showing the partners’ capital accounts and full details of the partners’ current accounts.
Eli and Sumit
Extract from Statement of Financial Position at 31 October 2017
$
Eli
$
Sumit
$
Total
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
......................................................................
...................
...................
...................
[10]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
18
6
Sanjay, a trader, prepared his trial balance on 31 January 2018. The totals of the trial balance did
not agree. Sanjay entered the difference, a credit balance of $1110, in a suspense account. The
following errors were later discovered.
1
The wages account had been undercast by $270.
2
Rent received, $1000, had been correctly entered in the bank account but no other entry had
been made.
3
Goods purchased on credit from Simon, $680, had been correctly entered in the purchases
account but had been posted to the account of Simone.
4
No entry had been made for stationery, $35, paid in cash.
5
Motor vehicle repairs, $700, had been debited to the motor vehicles account.
6
Purchases returns, $190, had been correctly entered in the supplier’s account but had been
debited to the sales returns account.
REQUIRED
(a) State two purposes of a trial balance.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Name the type of error made in 3, 4 and 5.
Error 3 .......................................................................................................................................
Error 4 .......................................................................................................................................
Error 5 ...................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
19
(c) Prepare the suspense account making the necessary entries to correct errors. Balance or
total the account as required.
Sanjay
Suspense account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
..........
..........................................
..........
[6]
(d) State whether all errors in Sanjay’s accounts have been discovered. Give your reason.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Question 6 (e) is on the next page.
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
[Turn over
20
Sanjay’s draft profit for the year ended 31 January 2018 was $24 250 before any errors were
corrected.
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the statement to show the corrected profit for the year ended 31 January 2018. If
an error has no effect on profit place a tick ( ) in the ‘No Effect’ column.
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 January 2018
No Effect
Increase
$
Decrease
$
$
24 250
Draft profit
Error 1
Error 2
Error 3
Error 4
Error 5
Error 6
Corrected profit
[8]
[Total: 21]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/F/M/18
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 1 6 2 6 0 3 4 7 9 8 *
0452/11
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
May/June 2018
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 22 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (RCL (DF)) 148225/3
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one
you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) For which accounts does the cash book act as a ledger account?
bank
cash
discount
allowed
discount
received
A
B
C
D
[1]
(b) Which statement about the division of the ledger is not correct?
A
Checking procedures can be introduced.
B
Fewer entries are needed in the sales and purchases accounts.
C
It is easier for reference and for locating accounts.
D
Work can be shared between two or more book-keepers.
[1]
(c) Which account may appear as a credit balance in a trial balance?
A
carriage outwards
B
discount received
C
drawings
D
inventory
[1]
(d) Insurance prepaid, $120, was treated as an accrual in the income statement.
Which effect did this have on the profit for the year?
A
overstated $120
B
overstated $240
C
understated $120
D
understated $240
[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
3
(e)
What is the correcting journal entry?
debit
$
Ahmed
Aktar
Suspense
250
250
Ahmed
Suspense
Aktar
250
250
Aktar
Ahmed
Suspense
500
C
Suspense
Ahmed
Aktar
500
D
A
B
credit
$
500
500
250
250
250
250
[1]
(f)
Hassan sells two products, X and Y. He provided the following information on 31 December
2017.
product
number of units
cost per unit
$
net realisable
value per unit
$
X
520
2.00
2.20
Y
390
3.00
2.80
50 units of product Y were damaged and will have to be destroyed.
A
$1992
B
$2132
C
$2164
D
$2314
[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
4
(g) What would not be included in a statement of changes in equity?
A
ordinary share dividend paid which relates to the previous year
B
ordinary share dividend proposed which relates to the current year
C
profit for the year
D
transfer to general reserve
[1]
(h) Beth and Carla are in partnership, sharing profits and losses 3:2. They provided the following
information at 31 January 2018.
$
Profit for the year
Interest on capital: Beth
Carla
4 000
3 000
Salary: Beth
$
42 000
7 000
10 000
What was the total
A
$15 000
B
$25 200
C
$29 000
D
$39 200
[1]
(i)
Some members of a sports club had not paid their annual subscriptions at the end of the
financial year.
Where will these unpaid subscriptions be shown in the financial statements?
receipts and
payments account
income and
expenditure account
statement of
financial position
A
B
C
D
[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
5
(j)
On 1 April 2017 trade receivables owed $4250 and on 31 March 2018 they owed $3940.
During the year $46 750 was received from trade receivables and they returned goods, $1130.
What were the credit sales for the year?
A
$46 440
B
$47 060
C
$47 570
D
$48 190
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
6
2
(a) Complete the following table indicating with a tick ( ) the section of a statement of financial
position in which each item would appear.
non-current
assets
current
assets
non-current
liabilities
current
liabilities
trade payables
5-year loan
inventory
loose tools
bank overdraft
rent receivable accrued
[3]
(b) (i)
State one advantage of being a partner rather than a sole trader.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
State one disadvantage of being a partner rather than a sole trader.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Name three interested parties (other than the business owner) who may wish to look at the
financial statements of a business. For each interested party state a reason for their interest.
interested party
reason for their interest
[6]
(d) State two causes of depreciation.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
7
(e) Complete the following table by writing either True or False against each statement about
depreciation.
True or False
The depreciation is calculated on the cost price
less residual value when the straight line (equal
instalment) method is used.
The percentage rate of depreciation decreases each
year when the reducing (diminishing) balance method is
used.
The provision for depreciation of a non-current asset
is deducted from the cost price in the statement of
financial position.
A provision for depreciation is a means of providing a
fund to purchase a replacement non-current asset.
[4]
(f)
Name one accounting objective.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(g) Name the accounting principle described by each of the following statements.
Accounting Principle
The same accounting treatment is applied to similar
items at all times.
Accounting assumes that a business will continue to
operate indefinitely.
Transactions are expressed in monetary terms.
Revenue is recognised as earned when ownership of
goods passes to the customer.
[4]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
8
3
Amira owns an advertising agency. Her financial year ends on 30 April.
On 1 April 2018 she decided to use a petty cash book with a monthly imprest of $80 which would
be restored on the first day of each month.
REQUIRED
(a) State one reason for using a petty cash book.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State one advantage of the imprest system of petty cash.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
On 1 April 2018 Amira put $80 cash in the petty cash box.
Her transactions for the month of April 2018 were as follows.
April 4
Bought stamps
$
3
7
Purchased printing paper
8
11
Purchased ink cartridges
12
19
Paid window cleaner
10
22
Paid KK Limited, a trade payable
35
29
Purchased flowers for reception desk
7
REQUIRED
(c)
Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 May 2018.
[10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
2018
April 1
Date
80
Total
received
$
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.........................................................................................
Cash
Details
$
$
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Postage
Total paid
..................
Amira
Petty Cash Book
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Computer
supplies
$
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
General
expenses
$
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Ledger
accounts
$
9
[Turn over
10
(d) Complete the following table to show the double entry to restore the petty cash imprest on
1 May 2018.
debit
$
credit
$
[3]
(e) Show the entry which would be made in the computer supplies account in April 2018. It is not
necessary to close or balance the account.
Amira
Computer supplies account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
.................................
..............
..........
.................................
..............
..........
.................................
..............
..........
.................................
..............
[1]
Amira balanced her cash book on 30 April 2018. The bank column showed that she had $17 620
in the bank.
On the same date the bank statement showed a different balance.
REQUIRED
(f)
State two reasons for preparing a bank reconciliation statement.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
A comparison of the cash book and the bank statement revealed the following.
$
1
Items appearing only on the bank statement
Bank charges
Dishonoured cheque, Jabir
Business rates paid by direct debit
2
Items appearing only in the cash book
Cheque received from Shadya
Cheque paid to Abasi
3
© UCLES 2018
28
153
95
Debit side of cash book was undercast
0452/11/M/J/18
824
1075
100
11
REQUIRED
(g) Update the cash book of Amira.
Bring down the updated balance on 1 May 2018.
Amira
Cash Book (bank columns only)
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
17 620
.............
................................
.............
2018
April 30
Balance b/d
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
[5]
(h) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement for Amira at 30 April 2018 to determine the balance
shown on the bank statement.
Amira
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 30 April 2018
$
.....................................................................................................................
........................
.....................................................................................................................
........................
.....................................................................................................................
........................
.....................................................................................................................
........................
.....................................................................................................................
........................
.....................................................................................................................
........................
.....................................................................................................................
........................
.....................................................................................................................
........................
[4]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
12
(i)
State the bank balance which would appear in the statement of financial position on
30 April 2018. Name the section in which it would appear.
Amount of bank balance $ .............................................
Section of statement of financial position ..............................................................................[2]
(j)
Suggest two possible reasons why the cheque from Jabir was dishonoured.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 31]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
13
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
14
4
Harry is a trader in farm machinery. He maintains a full set of accounting records. His financial
year ends on 31 March.
Harry made the following entries in his purchases journal and purchases returns journal in
March 2018.
Harry
Purchases Journal
2018
March 15
24
31
$
$
AX Limited
Goods
Less Trade discount
3250
650
2600
FM Limited
Goods
Less Trade discount
1820
273
1547
Total for month
4147
Purchases Returns Journal
2018
March 17
28
31
$
$
AX Limited
Goods
Less Trade discount
450
90
360
FM Limited
Goods
Less Trade discount
200
30
170
Total for month
530
Harry made the following payments by cheque.
2018
March 4
30
AX Limited, $2425, in full settlement of the amount due on that date.
FM Limited to settle the amount due on that date. No cash discount was received.
REQUIRED
(a) Enter the transactions for March in the following ledger accounts.
Close the accounts on 31 March 2018 by balancing or by making a transfer to the income
statement.
Some entries have already been made in the accounts during the year.
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
15
Harry
AX Limited account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
............
................................
.............
2018
Mar 1
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
Details
$
Balance b/d
$
2500
FM Limited account
Date
Details
$
Date
............
................................
.............
2018
Mar 1
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
Balance b/d
750
Purchases account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
43 000
............
................................
.............
2018
Feb 28
Total to date
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
16
Purchases returns account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
............
................................
.............
2018
Feb 28
Total to date
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
5020
[12]
(b) (i)
Suggest one reason why AX Limited allowed Harry trade discount on his purchases on
15 March 2018.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Calculate the percentage of trade discount AX Limited allowed Harry on his purchases
on 15 March 2018.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Name the following documents:
(i)
the document issued by AX Limited on 15 March 2018
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
the document issued by Harry on 17 March 2018
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
the document which AX Limited may issue on 31 March 2018
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
17
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
18
5
He provided the following information at the end of his first year of trading.
Purchases of raw materials
Direct factory wages
Indirect factory wages
General factory expenses
Carriage inwards
Factory heat and light
Factory insurance
Inventory at 31 January 2018: raw materials
work in progress
finished goods
$
48 400
38 800
27 140
3 150
1 950
1 110
1 860
5 150
7 260
5 500
Factory machinery, $75 000, was purchased on 1 February 2017 and is to be depreciated by
20% per annum.
REQUIRED
(a) Define and give one example of each
(i)
Raw materials
Definition ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Example .........................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
Work in progress
Definition ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Example .........................................................................................................................[2]
(iii)
Finished goods
Definition ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Example .........................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
19
(b) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 January 2018.
Addae
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 January 2018
$
$
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
[10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
20
The cost of production was higher than Addae expected.
REQUIRED
(c) Suggest two ways in which the cost of production could be reduced apart from purchasing
lower quality materials.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
After the preparation of the manufacturing account, Addae provided the following additional
information.
Revenue
Cost of sales
Administration and selling expenses
$
179 250
119 500
34 750
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate the percentage of gross profit to revenue (gross profit margin).
The calculation should be to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Calculate the percentage of profit for the year to revenue (net profit margin).
The calculation should be to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(f)
Suggest two ways in which the percentage of profit for the year to revenue could be improved.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 24]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
21
6
Mai is a trader. At the end of her financial year on 31 March 2018 she opened a suspense account
with a debit balance of $650.
REQUIRED
(a) State two reasons why it was necessary for Mai to open a suspense account.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Mai discovered that some errors had been made in her accounting records.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table to show the entries required to correct each error.
The first one has been completed as an example.
entries required to correct the error
error
debit
account
1
motor expenses, $150,
debited to motor vehicles
account
2
carriage inwards, $120,
debited to carriage
outwards account
3
sales journal overcast by
$1000
4
wages, $460, debited to
wages account as $640
motor expenses
credit
$
150
account
motor vehicles
$
150
[6]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
[Turn over
22
(c) State whether
Give a reason for your answer.
Have all the errors been discovered? ........................................................................................
Reason
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Complete the statement to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting errors 1–4.
Where the error does not affect the profit write “no effect”.
Mai
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2018
$
4150
Profit for the year before corrections
Increase
in profit
$
Decrease
in profit
$
Error 1
....................
....................
Error 2
....................
....................
Error 3
....................
....................
Error 4
....................
....................
Corrected profit for the year
[6]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/M/J/18
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 2 1 6 5 4 5 5 0 0 6 *
0452/12
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
May/June 2018
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
DC (RCL (DF)) 144912/2
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one
you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Jim supplies Debbie with goods on credit.
Which business document might Debbie send to Jim?
A
credit note
B
debit note
C
invoice
D
statement of account
[1]
(b) What would be recorded in the general journal?
A
bad debt written off
B
cash sale of goods
C
credit sale of goods
D
returns outwards
[1]
(c) Which item is not included as part of the calculation of net realisable value when valuing
inventory?
A
carriage inwards
B
cost of completing the goods
C
estimated receipts from sale of the goods
D
selling expenses
[1]
(d) How does a manufacturing business calculate the production cost of completed goods?
A
prime cost + factory overheads + opening work in progress – closing
work in progress
B
prime cost + factory overheads – opening work in progress + closing
work in progress
C
prime cost – factory overheads + opening work in progress – closing
work in progress
D
prime cost – factory overheads – opening work in progress + closing
work in progress
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[1]
3
(e) Anastasia purchased equipment, $28 000, on 1 January 2016. Her depreciation policy is to
use the reducing (diminishing) balance method at the rate of 20% per annum.
What was the net book value of the equipment on 31 December 2017?
(f)
A
$10 080
B
$11 200
C
$16 800
D
$17 920
[1]
Which is an item of capital expenditure?
A
annual redecoration of offices
B
buildings insurance
C
legal fees on purchase of factory
D
repairs to machinery
[1]
(g) Where will interest on drawings be recorded?
A
B
C
D
[1]
(h) B Limited provided the following details at 30 April 2018.
profit for the year ended 30 April 2018
ordinary share dividends paid
transfer to general reserve
retained earnings at 30 April 2018
$
72 500
15 000
5 000
285 000
What were retained earnings at the beginning of the financial year?
A
$227 500
B
$232 500
C
$337 500
D
$342 500
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
4
(i)
(j)
What does the going concern principle mean?
A
Non-current assets must be shown at expected sales value.
B
Revenue is recognised when ownership of goods passes to the
customer.
C
The business will continue to operate for the foreseeable future.
D
The financial statements should always use the same accounting
principles.
[1]
On 31 March 2018 Sasha had trade receivables of $95 000. She wrote off a bad debt, $750,
and made a provision for doubtful debts of 2% of trade receivables.
What was the figure for net trade receivables in the statement of financial position at
31 March 2018?
A
$92 350
B
$92 365
C
$93 115
D
$94 250
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
5
2
Mary keeps a full set of accounting records including books of prime (original) entry.
REQUIRED
(a) State two reasons why Mary uses books of prime (original) entry.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Mary banks all cash sales at the end of each week.
Mary had the following transactions during November.
1
Sold goods, $220, for cash
2
Returned goods costing $440, bought on credit from Jane
3
Purchased a motor vehicle on credit, $12 400, including road tax of $300, from Speedy
Motors
4
Received a cheque from Tan, a credit customer, in settlement of an invoice for $400 after
deduction of 2% cash discount
5
Took goods for own use, $120
REQUIRED
(b) Name the book of prime (original) entry where each of the transactions 1, 2 and 3 would be
recorded.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
3 .............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
6
(c) Complete the following table to show how each transaction was recorded by Mary. The first
one has been completed as an example.
1
Account(s) debited
$
Account(s) credited
$
Cash
220
Sales
220
2
3
4
5
[10]
(d) Calculate the bank balance at 30 November 2017.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(e) Name the ledger in which Mary maintains:
(i)
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Motor vehicles account
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
7
3
Kumu purchases goods for resale on both cash and credit terms.
Kumu provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2018.
Trade payables 1 May 2017
Trade payables 30 April 2018
Discount allowed
Discount received
Interest charged by suppliers
Credit purchases
Cash purchases
Sales ledger balances set off against purchases
ledger balances
$
19 800
22 200
480
330
122
180 870
26 400
400
REQUIRED
(a) Select the relevant items and prepare the purchases ledger control account for the year
ended 30 April 2018. Insert the amount paid to credit suppliers.
Kumu
Purchases ledger control account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
[8]
(b) State the formula for calculating the trade payables payment period.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
8
(c) Calculate the trade payables payment period for the year ended 30 April 2018. Round up
your answer to the next whole day.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d)
Give a reason for your answer.
Satisfied? ...................................................................................................................................
Reason ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) State two problems Kumu may face if her trade payables payment period is unsatisfactory.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Kumu provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2018.
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Inventory at 30 April 2018
$
205 000
92 250
35 000
REQUIRED
(f)
Calculate the percentage mark-up Kumu has applied.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
9
(g) Calculate the value of inventory at 1 May 2017.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(h) State the formula for the rate of inventory turnover.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(i)
should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
10
4
Chandra is a driving instructor. His pupils pay for their lessons in advance.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following sentences by selecting the correct word.
The first sentence has been completed as an example. The correct word should be selected
as shown in the example.
1
The motor vehicles account has a (debit/credit) balance in a trial balance.
2
A year end accrual is an amount (earned/owing) for an expense incurred in the
(current/previous) financial period. It will be included in the statement of financial
position as a current (asset/liability).
3
Accrued income is an amount (earned/owing) by the business which will be
received in the (current/next) financial period. It will be included in the statement of
financial position as a current (asset/liability).
[6]
Chandra started business on 1 February 2017. He charges $20 per lesson. Pupils must pay for
10 lessons in advance.
Total receipts for lessons for the year ended 31 January 2018 amounted to $20 200.
set of lessons paid for.
Joe
Adam
Billy
Number of
lessons given
6
4
8
REQUIRED
(b) Calculate the amount Chandra had received in advance for driving lesson fees at
31 January 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
11
(c) Calculate the amount of driving lesson fee income which Chandra included in his income
statement for the year ended 31 January 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d)
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Chandra calculated a draft profit of $8760 for the year ended 31 January 2018. The following
errors were later discovered.
1
Advertising expenses owing at the year-end had been overstated by $100.
2
Interest payable on a 6% bank loan of $10 000 had been omitted. The loan was taken on
1 February 2017.
4
Motor vehicle repairs, $210, had been recorded as motor insurance.
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the statement to show the corrected profit for the year ended 31 January 2018. If
an error has no effect on profit place a tick ( ) in the No Effect column.
Chandra
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 January 2018
No Effect
Increase
$
Draft profit
Decrease
$
$
8760
Error 1
Error 2
Error 3
Error 4
Corrected profit
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[6]
[Turn over
12
(f)
Name the accounting principle being applied when correctly dealing with the transaction in
error 3. Give a reason for your answer.
Accounting principle ..................................................................................................................
Reason ......................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Chandra wishes to compare his business results with those of LQ Limited, a large chain of driving
schools.
REQUIRED
(g) Suggest two reasons why Chandra may have difficulty comparing his business results with
those of LQ Limited.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
13
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
14
5
WB Sports Club has 250 members. The annual subscription is $20. The club provided the following
information.
Subscriptions received in advance on 1 April 2017
Subscriptions received during the year ended 31 March 2018
Subscriptions in arrears on 31 March 2018
$
120
4740
140
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2018. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 April 2018.
WB Sports Club
Subscriptions account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
[5]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
15
WB Sports Club also provided the following information.
On 1 April 2017
$
Balance at bank (as per cash book)
960 debit
During the year ended 31 March 2018
Rent paid
Entry fees received for gymnastics competition
Cost of prizes for gymnastics competition
General expenses
Insurance paid
Donations received
Purchase of sports equipment
2000
900
220
682
430
350
2760
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31 March 2018. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 April 2018.
WB Sports Club
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 31 March 2018
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
[10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
16
WB Sports Club calculated a surplus for the year of $1568.
The following additional information was provided at 31 March 2018.
Accumulated fund at 1 April 2017
Sports equipment at valuation 31 March 2018
Rent paid in advance
General expenses owing
$
15 563
15 760
500
127
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position of WB Sports Club at 31 March 2018.
WB Sports Club
Statement of Financial Position at 31 March 2018
$
$
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
[7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
17
(d) State how the accumulated fund of WB Sports Club has arisen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 24]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
18
6
Siegfried is a sole trader who does not maintain a complete set of double entry records. He has
provided the following information.
Equipment at cost
Inventory
Trade receivables
Trade payables
Bank
Bank overdraft
Accrued expenses
Prepaid rent
Capital
1 January
2017
$
18 000
2 415
1 930
1 210
–
835
–
–
20 300
31 December
2017
$
18 000
2 934
2 042
1 455
209
–
98
120
?
On 31 December 2017, Siegfried brought his own motor vehicle into the business, valued at
$5500. He decided to write off trade receivables, $100, and to start depreciating equipment by
20% per annum.
REQUIRED
(a)
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
19
REQUIRED
(b) Calculate the profit made by Siegfried for the year ended 31 December 2017.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
(c) State what is measured by the return on capital employed (ROCE).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State the formula for the calculation of the ROCE.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e)
the opening capital in your calculation which should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
[Turn over
20
Siegfried knows that he sold the same number of units and had applied the same mark-up in the
year ended 31 December 2017 as he did in the previous year, but made a lower profit for the year.
REQUIRED
(f)
Suggest one reason why Siegfried made a lower profit for the year for the year ended
31 December 2017 than the previous year.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(g) State three benefits to Siegfried of maintaining a full set of double entry records.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/M/J/18
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 5 8 8 8 4 2 5 1 3 8 *
0452/13
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
May/June 2018
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
DC (SC) 162994
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one
you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Jim supplies Debbie with goods on credit.
Which business document might Debbie send to Jim?
A
credit note
B
debit note
C
invoice
D
statement of account
[1]
(b) What would be recorded in the general journal?
A
bad debt written off
B
cash sale of goods
C
credit sale of goods
D
returns outwards
[1]
(c) Which item is not included as part of the calculation of net realisable value when valuing
inventory?
A
carriage inwards
B
cost of completing the goods
C
estimated receipts from sale of the goods
D
selling expenses
[1]
(d) How does a manufacturing business calculate the production cost of completed goods?
A
prime cost + factory overheads + opening work in progress – closing
work in progress
B
prime cost + factory overheads – opening work in progress + closing
work in progress
C
prime cost – factory overheads + opening work in progress – closing
work in progress
D
prime cost – factory overheads – opening work in progress + closing
work in progress
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[1]
3
(e) Anastasia purchased equipment, $28 000, on 1 January 2016. Her depreciation policy is to
use the reducing (diminishing) balance method at the rate of 20% per annum.
What was the net book value of the equipment on 31 December 2017?
(f)
A
$10 080
B
$11 200
C
$16 800
D
$17 920
[1]
Which is an item of capital expenditure?
A
annual redecoration of offices
B
buildings insurance
C
legal fees on purchase of factory
D
repairs to machinery
[1]
(g) Where will interest on drawings be recorded?
A
B
C
D
[1]
(h) B Limited provided the following details at 30 April 2018.
profit for the year ended 30 April 2018
ordinary share dividends paid
transfer to general reserve
retained earnings at 30 April 2018
$
72 500
15 000
5 000
285 000
What were retained earnings at the beginning of the financial year?
A
$227 500
B
$232 500
C
$337 500
D
$342 500
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
4
(i)
(j)
What does the going concern principle mean?
A
Non-current assets must be shown at expected sales value.
B
Revenue is recognised when ownership of goods passes to the
customer.
C
The business will continue to operate for the foreseeable future.
D
The financial statements should always use the same accounting
principles.
[1]
On 31 March 2018 Sasha had trade receivables of $95 000. She wrote off a bad debt, $750,
and made a provision for doubtful debts of 2% of trade receivables.
What was the figure for net trade receivables in the statement of financial position at
31 March 2018?
A
$92 350
B
$92 365
C
$93 115
D
$94 250
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
5
2
Mary keeps a full set of accounting records including books of prime (original) entry.
REQUIRED
(a) State two reasons why Mary uses books of prime (original) entry.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Mary banks all cash sales at the end of each week.
Mary had the following transactions during November.
1
Sold goods, $220, for cash
2
Returned goods costing $440, bought on credit from Jane
3
Purchased a motor vehicle on credit, $12 400, including road tax of $300, from Speedy
Motors
4
Received a cheque from Tan, a credit customer, in settlement of an invoice for $400 after
deduction of 2% cash discount
5
Took goods for own use, $120
REQUIRED
(b) Name the book of prime (original) entry where each of the transactions 1, 2 and 3 would be
recorded.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
3 .............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
6
(c) Complete the following table to show how each transaction was recorded by Mary. The first
one has been completed as an example.
1
Account(s) debited
$
Account(s) credited
$
Cash
220
Sales
220
2
3
4
5
[10]
(d) Calculate the bank balance at 30 November 2017.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(e) Name the ledger in which Mary maintains:
(i)
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Motor vehicles account
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
7
3
Kumu purchases goods for resale on both cash and credit terms.
Kumu provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2018.
Trade payables 1 May 2017
Trade payables 30 April 2018
Discount allowed
Discount received
Interest charged by suppliers
Credit purchases
Cash purchases
Sales ledger balances set off against purchases
ledger balances
$
19 800
22 200
480
330
122
180 870
26 400
400
REQUIRED
(a) Select the relevant items and prepare the purchases ledger control account for the year
ended 30 April 2018. Insert the amount paid to credit suppliers.
Kumu
Purchases ledger control account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
[8]
(b) State the formula for calculating the trade payables payment period.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
8
(c) Calculate the trade payables payment period for the year ended 30 April 2018. Round up
your answer to the next whole day.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d)
Give a reason for your answer.
Satisfied? ...................................................................................................................................
Reason ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) State two problems Kumu may face if her trade payables payment period is unsatisfactory.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Kumu provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2018.
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Inventory at 30 April 2018
$
205 000
92 250
35 000
REQUIRED
(f)
Calculate the percentage mark-up Kumu has applied.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
9
(g) Calculate the value of inventory at 1 May 2017.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(h) State the formula for the rate of inventory turnover.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(i)
should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
10
4
Chandra is a driving instructor. His pupils pay for their lessons in advance.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following sentences by selecting the correct word.
The first sentence has been completed as an example. The correct word should be selected
as shown in the example.
1
The motor vehicles account has a (debit/credit) balance in a trial balance.
2
A year end accrual is an amount (earned/owing) for an expense incurred in the
(current/previous) financial period. It will be included in the statement of financial
position as a current (asset/liability).
3
Accrued income is an amount (earned/owing) by the business which will be
received in the (current/next) financial period. It will be included in the statement of
financial position as a current (asset/liability).
[6]
Chandra started business on 1 February 2017. He charges $20 per lesson. Pupils must pay for
10 lessons in advance.
Total receipts for lessons for the year ended 31 January 2018 amounted to $20 200.
set of lessons paid for.
Joe
Adam
Billy
Number of
lessons given
6
4
8
REQUIRED
(b) Calculate the amount Chandra had received in advance for driving lesson fees at
31 January 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
11
(c) Calculate the amount of driving lesson fee income which Chandra included in his income
statement for the year ended 31 January 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d)
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Chandra calculated a draft profit of $8760 for the year ended 31 January 2018. The following
errors were later discovered.
1
Advertising expenses owing at the year-end had been overstated by $100.
2
Interest payable on a 6% bank loan of $10 000 had been omitted. The loan was taken on
1 February 2017.
4
Motor vehicle repairs, $210, had been recorded as motor insurance.
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the statement to show the corrected profit for the year ended 31 January 2018. If
an error has no effect on profit place a tick ( ) in the No Effect column.
Chandra
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 January 2018
No Effect
Increase
$
Draft profit
Decrease
$
$
8760
Error 1
Error 2
Error 3
Error 4
Corrected profit
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[6]
[Turn over
12
(f)
Name the accounting principle being applied when correctly dealing with the transaction in
error 3. Give a reason for your answer.
Accounting principle ..................................................................................................................
Reason ......................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Chandra wishes to compare his business results with those of LQ Limited, a large chain of driving
schools.
REQUIRED
(g) Suggest two reasons why Chandra may have difficulty comparing his business results with
those of LQ Limited.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
13
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
14
5
WB Sports Club has 250 members. The annual subscription is $20. The club provided the following
information.
Subscriptions received in advance on 1 April 2017
Subscriptions received during the year ended 31 March 2018
Subscriptions in arrears on 31 March 2018
$
120
4740
140
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2018. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 April 2018.
WB Sports Club
Subscriptions account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
[5]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
15
WB Sports Club also provided the following information.
On 1 April 2017
$
Balance at bank (as per cash book)
960 debit
During the year ended 31 March 2018
Rent paid
Entry fees received for gymnastics competition
Cost of prizes for gymnastics competition
General expenses
Insurance paid
Donations received
Purchase of sports equipment
2000
900
220
682
430
350
2760
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31 March 2018. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 April 2018.
WB Sports Club
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 31 March 2018
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
..........
......................................
..............
[10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
16
WB Sports Club calculated a surplus for the year of $1568.
The following additional information was provided at 31 March 2018.
Accumulated fund at 1 April 2017
Sports equipment at valuation 31 March 2018
Rent paid in advance
General expenses owing
$
15 563
15 760
500
127
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position of WB Sports Club at 31 March 2018.
WB Sports Club
Statement of Financial Position at 31 March 2018
$
$
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
[7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
17
(d) State how the accumulated fund of WB Sports Club has arisen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 24]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
18
6
Siegfried is a sole trader who does not maintain a complete set of double entry records. He has
provided the following information.
Equipment at cost
Inventory
Trade receivables
Trade payables
Bank
Bank overdraft
Accrued expenses
Prepaid rent
Capital
1 January
2017
$
18 000
2 415
1 930
1 210
–
835
–
–
20 300
31 December
2017
$
18 000
2 934
2 042
1 455
209
–
98
120
?
On 31 December 2017, Siegfried brought his own motor vehicle into the business, valued at
$5500. He decided to write off trade receivables, $100, and to start depreciating equipment by
20% per annum.
REQUIRED
(a)
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
19
REQUIRED
(b) Calculate the profit made by Siegfried for the year ended 31 December 2017.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
(c) State what is measured by the return on capital employed (ROCE).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State the formula for the calculation of the ROCE.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e)
the opening capital in your calculation which should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
[Turn over
20
Siegfried knows that he sold the same number of units and had applied the same mark-up in the
year ended 31 December 2017 as he did in the previous year, but made a lower profit for the year.
REQUIRED
(f)
Suggest one reason why Siegfried made a lower profit for the year for the year ended
31 December 2017 than the previous year.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(g) State three benefits to Siegfried of maintaining a full set of double entry records.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/M/J/18
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 3 7 3 3 9 3 1 1 9 5 *
0452/11
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
October/November 2018
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
DC (SLM) 170897
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one
you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Which task would an accountant perform?
A
drawing up a trial balance
B
entering transactions in the ledger
C
preparing financial statements
D
writing up the cash book
[1]
(b) Amina returned goods to Nadia.
Which document did Amina issue?
A
credit note
B
debit note
C
invoice
D
statement of account
[1]
(c) Arissa purchased a motor vehicle costing $23 000 on 1 August 2016. She decided to
depreciate the motor vehicle using the straight line (equal instalment) method at 20% per
annum.
Depreciation on the motor vehicle of $4600 was charged to the income statement for the year
ended 31 July 2017.
How much was charged to the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2018 for
depreciation on the motor vehicle?
A
$3680
B
$4600
C
$8280
D
$9200
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/11/O/N/18
3
(d) A trader provided the following information on 1 October 2018.
Non-current assets
Inventory
Bank overdraft
Trade receivables
Trade payables
Loan repayable 30 September 2020
$
121 000
35 000
9 000
29 000
25 000
70 000
How much was the capital employed?
A
$30 000
B
$81 000
C
$151 000
D
$185 000
[1]
(e) Which is an intangible asset?
(f)
A
goodwill
B
inventory
C
office fixtures
D
trade receivables
[1]
Mahendra designs computer systems. He provided the following information.
Fees prepaid by clients at the start of the year
Fees received from clients during the year
Fees owing by clients at the end of the year
$
2 120
42 150
2 840
How much would be entered for fees in the income statement?
A
$37 190
B
$41 430
C
$42 870
D
$47 110
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
4
(g) Amy and John are in partnership. Amy is entitled to an annual partnership salary of $9000.
Profits and losses are shared 2:1. The profit for the year ended 31 August 2018 was $14 700.
A
$10 700
B
$14 900
C
$16 700
D
$20 900
[1]
(h) A sports club purchased sports equipment.
Where will this be entered in the financial statements at the year end?
receipts and payments
account
income and
expenditure account
statement of financial
position
A
B
C
D
[1]
(i)
How is cost of production calculated?
A
direct material + direct labour
B
direct material + direct labour + factory overheads
C
direct material + direct labour + factory overheads + increase in work
in progress
D
direct material + direct labour + factory overheads – increase in work
in progress
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[1]
5
(j)
A business provided the following information.
year 1
year 2
percentage of gross profit to revenue
30%
25%
percentage of profit for the year to revenue
12%
8%
The revenue was the same in both years.
Which statements are correct?
1 Cost of sales was higher in year 2.
2 Cost of sales was lower in year 2.
3 Expenses were higher in year 2.
4 Expenses were lower in year 2.
A
1 and 3
B
1 and 4
C
2 and 3
D
2 and 4
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
6
2
(a)
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Complete the following table stating the double entry necessary to record each transaction in
the ledger of Evie, who sells computers and computer accessories.
transaction
account to be
debited
account to be
credited
obtained loan from bank
purchased office fixtures by cheque
sold computer for cash
took printer for personal use
[8]
(c) State one reason why a trial balance is prepared.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Complete the following table, indicating with a tick ( ) where each account would appear in a
trial balance.
debit
column
credit
column
capital
drawings
provision for depreciation
carriage inwards
carriage outwards
rent received
stationery
sales returns
[4]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
7
(e) Give one example of each of the following errors which will not be revealed by a trial balance.
Error of commission ..................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Error of omission ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Compensating error ..................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(f)
Complete the following sentences.
Money spent on purchasing or improving non-current assets is known as ..............................
…………………………………………………
Money spent on the day-to-day running of a business is known as ………………………………
…………………………………………………
[2]
(g) Complete the following table by placing a tick ( ) to indicate where each item will appear in
the financial statements of Anwar, who owns a food store.
Income Statement
Statement of
Financial Position
purchase of motor vehicle
charge for delivering motor vehicle
insurance for motor vehicle
fuel for motor vehicle
[4]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
8
3
Lefika is a trader. He maintains a three column cash book.
Lefika had the following transactions in August 2018.
August 5
Received a cheque from Tabia, $441, in settlement of her account less 2% cash
discount
8
16
Received a cheque from Nyack, $282, in full settlement of his debt of $290
28
Cash sales, $243, of which $153 was paid directly into the bank
30
Received $250 cash from the disposal of a non-current asset
31
Lefika took cash, $200, for personal use
31
Paid all the cash into the bank except $20
REQUIRED
(a)
Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 September 2018.
[12]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
© UCLES 2018
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
………
………
………
………
……………………………
………
……………………………
……………………………
………
………
……………………………
………
……………………………
……………………………
………
………
……………………………
………
b/d
Balance
Details
2018
Aug 1
Date
0452/11/O/N/18
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Discount
allowed
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
30
Cash
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Bank
$
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
2018
Aug 1
Date
Lefika
Cash Book
b/d
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
Balance
Details
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Discount
received
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Cash
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
1253
Bank
$
9
[Turn over
10
book with the bank statement and found that the bank had not recorded the transactions entered
in the bank columns of the cash book on the following dates.
August 8
16
28
31
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 August 2018.
Lefika
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 August 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
REQUIRED
(c) State one advantage of dividing the ledger into these three sections.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Name the ledger in which each of the following accounts would appear.
(i)
Nyack (a credit customer) account ........................................ ledger
(ii) Purchases account ............................................................... ledger
(iii) Discount received account .................................................... ledger
(iv) Tebago (a credit supplier) account ........................................ ledger
[4]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
11
4
Ava operates a secretarial agency. Her financial year ends on 31 July.
She provided the following information on 31 July 2018.
1
A cheque for $194 was received from Wilma, a credit customer, whose account had been
written off in 2016.
2
Gary, a credit customer, paid one third of the amount he owed in cash. The balance is
regarded as irrecoverable and should be written off.
3
The provision for doubtful debts should be increased by $150.
4
The discount allowed for July 2018 of $144 should be transferred to the discount allowed
account.
5
The office equipment cost $16 000 and is being depreciated using the straight line (equal
instalment) method at 20% per annum. No office equipment had been bought or sold during
the year.
REQUIRED
(a)
Close the accounts by balancing or by making a transfer to an appropriate account.
Some entries have already been made in the accounts during the year.
Ava
Bad debts recovered account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
………
……………………
……….
………
……………………
…………
………
……………………
……….
………
……………………
…………
………
……………………
……….
………
……………………
…………
Date
Details
$
……….
……………………
…………
Bad debts account
Date
2018
July 1
Details
Total to date
$
218
………
……………………
………. ……….
……………………
…………
………
……………………
………. ……….
……………………
…………
………
……………………
………. ……….
……………………
…………
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
12
Gary account
Date
2018
July 1
Details
$
Date
Details
$
270
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
Balance
b/d
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date
Details
$
Date
2017
……… ……………………… ……… Aug 1
Details
Balance
b/d
$
310
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
Discount allowed account
Date
2018
July 1
Details
$
Date
Details
$
1495
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
© UCLES 2018
Total to date
0452/11/O/N/18
13
Provision for depreciation of office equipment account
Date
Details
$
Date
2017
Aug 1
Details
$
……….
…………………….. ………..
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
Balance
b/d
9600
[14]
(b) Name two accounting principles Ava is applying by maintaining a provision for doubtful debts.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................... [2]
Ava allows her trade receivables a credit period of 30 days. She provided the following information.
Trade receivables collection period
At 31 July 2017
32 days
At 31 July 2018
28 days
REQUIRED
(c)
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Ava is proposing to ask clients to pay cash instead of offering credit terms.
(d) Suggest two effects of this proposal.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
14
5
Khalid is a furniture wholesaler. His financial year ends on 30 September.
All purchases and sales are made on credit terms.
Khalid does not maintain a full set of accounting records but was able to provide the following
information.
$
On 1 October 2017
Inventory
Trade receivables
3 100
4 620
During the year ended 30 September 2018
Cheques received from trade receivables
Discount allowed
Bad debts written off
Total purchases
47 970
1 230
115
39 200
On 30 September 2018
Trade receivables
3 305
After the warehouse was closed on 30 September a fire broke out and a quantity of the inventory
was destroyed. The undamaged inventory was valued at $1500.
The profit mark-up is 25%.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the sales for the year ended 30 September 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
15
(b) Prepare an income statement (trading account section) to calculate the value of the inventory
which was destroyed.
Khalid
Income Statement (Trading Account section) for the year ended 30 September 2018
$
$
$
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
[7]
(c) (i)
Calculate the rate of inventory turnover. The calculation should include the total inventory
before the fire broke out on 30 September 2018.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what is measured by the rate of inventory turnover.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
16
Khalid decided that in future he would maintain a full set of double entry records and prepare
control accounts at the end of each month.
REQUIRED
(d) Complete the table by using a tick ( ) to show where each of the following items would appear
debit
credit
opening balance owed to credit suppliers
credit purchases
cheques paid to credit suppliers
cash discount received
contra between sales and purchases ledgers
[5]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
17
6
The financial year of FW Limited ends on 30 September.
The following information is available.
At 1 October 2017
Ordinary share capital of $1 shares
5% Debentures (repayable 2024)
General reserve
Retained earnings
$
100 000
140 000
115 000
117 000
On 30 September 2018
Issue of $1 ordinary shares
Profit for the year
Transfer to general reserve
Payment of ordinary share dividend
$
50 000
28 000
15 000
19 000
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position at 30 September 2018 to show the
equity and reserves and non-current liabilities.
FW Limited
Extract from Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
18
(b) Define each of the following terms.
i(i) Shareholders
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Limited liability
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) i(i) State one difference between ordinary shares and preference shares.
ordinary shares
preference shares
………………………………………….
………………………………………….
………………………………………….
………………………………………….
[2]
(ii) State two similarities between preference shares and debentures.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
19
The directors of FW Limited want to raise $60 000 to purchase additional premises.
The directors are considering two proposals:
Proposal 1
Issuing 5% debentures (repayable 2030)
Proposal 2
Issuing ordinary shares
It is anticipated that the ordinary share dividend will be 6% per annum.
REQUIRED
(d) State how each proposal would affect the profit of FW Limited in the next financial year (if at
all). Give a reason for your answer in each case.
Proposal 1
Effect on profit ...........................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Proposal 2
Effect on profit ...........................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
[Turn over
20
The following information was available on 30 September 2018.
Inventory
Trade receivables
Trade payables
Cash at bank
Loan repayable on 1 January 2019
$
42 000
34 000
35 000
36 000
30 000
REQUIRED
(e) Calculate the current ratio.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate the effect each
would have on the current ratio.
effect on current ratio
increase
decrease
no effect
use the bank balance to repay the loan
purchase non-current assets on credit
sell half the inventory at cost price to cash
customers
pay amount owed to trade payables by
cheque
[4]
[Total: 23]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0452/11/O/N/18
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 3 7 0 3 5 8 4 6 1 8 *
0452/12
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
October/November 2018
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 22 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (RCL/GO) 156837/3
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one
you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Profit is only recorded in the financial statements when legal title passes between buyer and
seller.
Which accounting principle is being applied?
A
consistency
B
going concern
C
prudence
D
realisation
[1]
(b) David and Bashir are in partnership. David made a loan to the partnership.
What is the double entry to record this transaction?
account debited
account credited
A
bank
David capital
B
bank
David loan
C
David loan
David capital
D
David loan
David current
[1]
(c) Which statement about debentures is not correct?
A
Debentures have a fixed rate of interest.
B
Debenture interest must be paid regardless of profit made.
C
Debentures are a non-current liability.
D
Debentures carry voting rights.
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/12/O/N/18
3
(d) Marvin provided the following information.
revenue for the year
percentage of gross profit to revenue
percentage of profit to revenue
$
10 000
40%
15%
What were the expenses for the year?
A
$1500
B
$2500
C
$6000
D
$8500
[1]
(e) Matthias provided the following summary from his financial statements.
$
67 400
48 700
29 100
8 000
Non-current assets
Current assets
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
What was the capital employed?
A
$11 600
B
$40 700
C
$79 000
D
$108 100
[1]
(f)
Which type of error has been made?
A
commission
B
compensating
C
original entry
D
principle
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
4
(g)
A
A company can only issue a limited number of shares.
B
A company can only pay a fixed amount of dividends.
C
Shareholders are not at risk of losing personal possessions.
D
[1]
(h) Pia sells two products, X and Y. She provided the following information about her inventory at
the year end.
Product
Cost $
Selling price $
X
1750
1850
Y
1924
1858
What was the total value of inventory to be included in the financial statements?
(i)
(j)
A
$2608
B
$2674
C
$2708
D
$2774
[1]
What is the role of a book-keeper?
A
to advise on business plans
B
to analyse the profit or loss for the period
C
to maintain records of financial transactions
D
to prepare financial statements
[1]
Baljit paid rent, $2700, in advance for the three months ended 31 March 2018.
He adjusted his financial statements for the year ended 31 January 2018 for rent prepaid.
Which effect did this have on the total expenses for the year?
A
decrease by $900
B
decrease by $1800
C
increase by $900
D
increase by $1800
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
5
2
Jennifer started in business on 1 June 2018 with the following assets and liabilities.
Delivery van
Fixtures and fittings
Inventory
Cash
Loan from Amina
$
15 000
12 700
16 200
11 500
15 000
REQUIRED
(a)
is required.
Jennifer
Journal
Date
Debit
$
Credit
$
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………
……………………………………………………………
…………
…………
[5]
(b) State the purpose of a narrative in a journal entry.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State two uses of the general journal in addition to the recording of opening entries of a
business.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
6
capital of $30 000, of which he paid $25 000 into the business bank account.
The table shows the account balances following transactions that have taken place.
1 October
2018
2 October
2018
3 October
2018
4 October
2018
$
$
$
$
11 500
11 500
11 500
10 000
10 000
Assets
Office equipment
Motor vehicle
Bank
25 000
25 000
25 000
25 000
Cash
15 000
13 500
13 500
12 500
10 000
10 000
30 000
29 000
Liabilities
Payables
Capital
30 000
30 000
REQUIRED
(d) State for each date the transaction which has taken place.
The first transaction has been completed as an example.
1 October 2018
John introduced capital of which some was banked and some kept in cash.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 October 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 October 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
4 October 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
7
(e) State the accounting principle which John applied when recording all these transactions.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f)
State the meaning of
iii(i) assets .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
ii(ii) liabilities .............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) capital .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(g)
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
8
3
Saul prepared the following trial balance at 31 March 2018 which contains errors.
Motor vehicle at net book value
Revenue
Purchases
Inventory
Bank overdraft
Cash in hand
Drawings
Discount allowed
Other operating expenses
Wages and salaries
Capital
Difference
$
138 000
109 000
$
180 230
1 5 100
113 900
111 500
16 500
11 720
9 350
116 500
188 250
135 000
160 700
188 250
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare a corrected trial balance at 31 March 2018.
Saul
Corrected Trial Balance at 31 March 2018
Debit
$
Credit
$
Motor vehicle at net book value
Revenue
Purchases
Inventory
Bank overdraft
Cash in hand
Drawings
Discount allowed
Other operating expenses
Wages and salaries
Capital
[7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
9
From 1 April 2018, Saul decided to make sales and purchases on credit.
He maintains a full set of accounting records and prepares control accounts at the end of each
month.
REQUIRED
(b)
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Complete the table to name the book of prime (original) entry which Saul uses to obtain
information when preparing his control accounts.
The first one has been completed as an example.
Book of prime (original) entry
Purchases
Purchases Journal
Cash and cheques received from credit customers
Bad debts written off
Discount received from credit suppliers
Sales returns
Interest charged by credit suppliers
[5]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
10
Saul provided the following information for the month ended 30 June 2018.
2018
June 1
30
July 1
© UCLES 2018
Sales ledger debit balances
Sales ledger credit balances
$
16 420
390
Credit sales
Sales returns
Cash and cheques received from credit customers
Bad debt written off
Sales ledger balance set off against purchases ledger balance
Discount allowed
Interest charged to credit customers on overdue accounts
39 800
2 700
36 350
340
760
?
175
Sales ledger debit balances
Sales ledger credit balances
15 485
200
0452/12/O/N/18
11
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the sales ledger control account for the month of June 2018.
Insert the figure for discount allowed.
Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 July 2018.
Saul
Sales ledger control account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
……
…………………………
…………
[10]
(e) State two benefits of maintaining a sales ledger control account.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 25]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
12
4
Most businesses have receipts and payments which include both capital and revenue items.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table by inserting a tick ( ) to show how each item should be classified.
The first one has been completed as an example.
Capital
expenditure
Revenue
expenditure
Capital
receipt
Revenue
receipt
Motor vehicle repairs
Legal fees on purchase of office building
Purchase of goods for resale
Insurance of plant and equipment
Proceeds of sale of fixtures at net book
value
Discount received from supplier
[5]
Ahmed is a wholesaler. He provided the following draft income statement for the year ended
30 September 2018, which contains errors.
Ahmed
Draft Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2018
$
Revenue
Proceeds from sale of motor vehicle
Opening inventory
Purchases
$
75 000
52 600
77 600
58 500
52 200
60 700
5(7 300)
Closing inventory
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Expenses
Profit for the year
(53 400)
24 200
(12 900)
11 300
Additional information
1
Purchases included $15 000 for new plant and equipment.
2
The motor vehicle was sold at net book value. No entry had been made in the motor vehicles
account.
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
13
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table by inserting a tick ( ) to show the effect of correcting the errors
on each of the following items.
Increase
Decrease
Plant and equipment
Motor vehicle
[2]
(c) Complete the statement to calculate the corrected gross profit for the year ended
30 September 2018.
Ahmed
Statement of corrected gross profit for the year ended 30 September 2018
Increase
$
Decrease
$
$
Draft gross profit
24 200
Corrected gross profit
[3]
1 April 2017:
$
Office equipment:
cost
provision for depreciation
9000
3600
none in the
year of sale.
cost of $1500. Sales proceeds, $1100, were received by cheque.
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
14
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the provision for depreciation account for office equipment for the year ended
31 March 2018. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 April 2018.
Provision for depreciation account for office equipment
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
[5]
(e) Prepare the office equipment disposal account.
Office equipment disposal account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
………
…………………………
…………
[4]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
15
(f)
office equipment.
Extract from Statement of Financial Position at 31 March 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(g) Name the accounting principle applied when charging depreciation.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
16
5
TP Limited manufactures toys.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table by inserting a tick ( ) to show how each type of manufacturing cost
should be classified. The first one has been completed as an example.
Direct
material
Direct
labour
Factory
overhead
Purchase of plastic toy parts
Rent of factory
Wages of machine operator
Purchase of packaging
Wages of supervisor
[4]
(b) State how prime cost is calculated.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
TP Limited provided the following information.
$
Inventory on 1 June 2017
Raw materials
Work in progress
Finished goods
1 18 000
1 15 750
1 27 200
For the year ended 31 May 2018
Purchases of raw material
Factory wages
Factory overheads
Purchases of finished goods
Revenue
323 000
198 000
125 000
1128 900
836 000
Inventory on 31 May 2018
Raw materials
Work in progress
Finished goods
© UCLES 2018
122 100
11 6 820
130 100
0452/12/O/N/18
17
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 May 2018.
TP Limited
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 May 2018
$
$
…………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
…………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
[6]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
18
(d) Prepare the income statement (trading account section) for the year ended 31 May 2018.
TP Limited
Income Statement (Trading Account section) for the year ended 31 May 2018
$
$
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
………………………………………………………………………
……………
……………
[4]
(e) State two reasons why TP Limited purchases finished goods.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
19
(f)
Name the accounting principle applied when valuing inventory.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
for the previous year.
REQUIRED
(g) Suggest two reasons why the rate of inventory turnover is lower than the previous year.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
The directors of TP Limited compared their rate of inventory turnover with that of GH Limited, a
bakery. GH Limited has a rate of inventory turnover of 53.41 times.
REQUIRED
(h) Suggest two reasons why GH Limited has a higher rate of inventory turnover than TP Limited.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[Turn over
20
6
CC Club provides sporting facilities and also runs a café for its members. The receipts and
payments account for the year ended 30 September 2018 is as follows.
CC Club
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 30 September 2018
$
2017
Oct 1
2018
Sep 30
Oct 1
Balance b/d
13 125
Subscriptions
Receipts from café
Competition entry fees
24 500
14 145
11 550
Balance b/d
43 320
13 350
$
2018
Sep 30
Rent
Purchases of food for café
General expenses
Purchase of sports
equipment
Wages of club staff
Wages of café staff
Competition prizes
Balance c/d
14 000
12 300
16 870
17 600
16 900
11 800
1 1500
13 350
43 320
Additional information.
1
Café inventory
1 October 2017
30 September 2018
2
$
200
185
Subscriptions in arrears
1 October 2017
30 September 2018
$
750
650
3
Sports equipment was valued at $37 400 on 1 October 2017 and $36 750 on 30 September
2018.
4
At 30 September 2018, rent paid in advance was $500 and general expenses owing were
$320.
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
21
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the profit of the club café for the year ended 30 September 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b)
CC Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 30 September 2018
$
$
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
………………………………………………………………………
…………
…………
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
[9]
[Turn over
22
(c) State three differences between a receipts and payments account and an income and
expenditure account.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
CC Club wishes to improve the profit earned by the café.
REQUIRED
(d) Suggest three ways the club could improve its café profit.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0452/12/O/N/18
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 5 7 9 4 9 3 4 6 0 9 *
0452/13
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
October/November 2018
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
DC (RCL/GO) 156836/1
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one
you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Which task would an accountant perform?
A
drawing up a trial balance
B
entering transactions in the ledger
C
preparing financial statements
D
writing up the cash book
[1]
(b) Amina returned goods to Nadia.
Which document did Amina issue?
A
credit note
B
debit note
C
invoice
D
statement of account
[1]
(c) Arissa purchased a motor vehicle costing $23 000 on 1 August 2016. She decided to
depreciate the motor vehicle using the straight line (equal instalment) method at 20% per
annum.
Depreciation on the motor vehicle of $4600 was charged to the income statement for the year
ended 31 July 2017.
How much was charged to the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2018 for
depreciation on the motor vehicle?
A
$3680
B
$4600
C
$8280
D
$9200
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/13/O/N/18
3
(d) A trader provided the following information on 1 October 2018.
Non-current assets
Inventory
Bank overdraft
Trade receivables
Trade payables
Loan repayable 30 September 2020
$
121 000
35 000
9 000
29 000
25 000
70 000
How much was the capital employed?
A
$30 000
B
$81 000
C
$151 000
D
$185 000
[1]
(e) Which is an intangible asset?
(f)
A
goodwill
B
inventory
C
office fixtures
D
trade receivables
[1]
Mahendra designs computer systems. He provided the following information.
Fees prepaid by clients at the start of the year
Fees received from clients during the year
Fees owing by clients at the end of the year
$
2 120
42 150
2 840
How much would be entered for fees in the income statement?
A
$37 190
B
$41 430
C
$42 870
D
$47 110
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
4
(g) Amy and John are in partnership. Amy is entitled to an annual partnership salary of $9000.
Profits and losses are shared 2:1. The profit for the year ended 31 August 2018 was $14 700.
A
$10 700
B
$14 900
C
$16 700
D
$20 900
[1]
(h) A sports club purchased sports equipment.
Where will this be entered in the financial statements at the year end?
receipts and payments
account
income and
expenditure account
statement of financial
position
A
B
C
D
[1]
(i)
How is cost of production calculated?
A
direct material + direct labour
B
direct material + direct labour + factory overheads
C
direct material + direct labour + factory overheads + increase in work
in progress
D
direct material + direct labour + factory overheads – increase in work
in progress
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[1]
5
(j)
A business provided the following information.
year 1
year 2
percentage of gross profit to revenue
30%
25%
percentage of profit for the year to revenue
12%
8%
The revenue was the same in both years.
Which statements are correct?
1 Cost of sales was higher in year 2.
2 Cost of sales was lower in year 2.
3 Expenses were higher in year 2.
4 Expenses were lower in year 2.
A
1 and 3
B
1 and 4
C
2 and 3
D
2 and 4
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
6
2
(a)
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Complete the following table stating the double entry necessary to record each transaction in
the ledger of Evie, who sells computers and computer accessories.
transaction
account to be
debited
account to be
credited
obtained loan from bank
purchased office fixtures by cheque
sold computer for cash
took printer for personal use
[8]
(c) State one reason why a trial balance is prepared.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Complete the following table, indicating with a tick ( ) where each account would appear in a
trial balance.
debit
column
credit
column
capital
drawings
provision for depreciation
carriage inwards
carriage outwards
rent received
stationery
sales returns
[4]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
7
(e) Give one example of each of the following errors which will not be revealed by a trial balance.
Error of commission ..................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Error of omission ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Compensating error ..................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(f)
Complete the following sentences.
Money spent on purchasing or improving non-current assets is known as ..............................
…………………………………………………
Money spent on the day-to-day running of a business is known as ………………………………
…………………………………………………
[2]
(g) Complete the following table by placing a tick ( ) to indicate where each item will appear in
the financial statements of Anwar, who owns a food store.
Income Statement
Statement of
Financial Position
purchase of motor vehicle
charge for delivering motor vehicle
insurance for motor vehicle
fuel for motor vehicle
[4]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
8
3
Lefika is a trader. He maintains a three column cash book.
Lefika had the following transactions in August 2018.
August 5
Received a cheque from Tabia, $441, in settlement of her account less 2% cash
discount
8
16
Received a cheque from Nyack, $282, in full settlement of his debt of $290
28
Cash sales, $243, of which $153 was paid directly into the bank
30
Received $250 cash from the disposal of a non-current asset
31
Lefika took cash, $200, for personal use
31
Paid all the cash into the bank except $20
REQUIRED
(a)
Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 September 2018.
[12]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
© UCLES 2018
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
………
………
………
………
……………………………
………
……………………………
……………………………
………
………
……………………………
………
……………………………
……………………………
………
………
……………………………
………
b/d
Balance
Details
2018
Aug 1
Date
0452/13/O/N/18
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Discount
allowed
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
30
Cash
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Bank
$
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
………
2018
Aug 1
Date
Lefika
Cash Book
b/d
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
Balance
Details
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Discount
received
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
Cash
$
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
…………
1253
Bank
$
9
[Turn over
10
book with the bank statement and found that the bank had not recorded the transactions entered
in the bank columns of the cash book on the following dates.
August 8
16
28
31
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 August 2018.
Lefika
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 August 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
REQUIRED
(c) State one advantage of dividing the ledger into these three sections.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Name the ledger in which each of the following accounts would appear.
(i)
Nyack (a credit customer) account ........................................ ledger
(ii) Purchases account ............................................................... ledger
(iii) Discount received account .................................................... ledger
(iv) Tebago (a credit supplier) account ........................................ ledger
[4]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
11
4
Ava operates a secretarial agency. Her financial year ends on 31 July.
She provided the following information on 31 July 2018.
1
A cheque for $194 was received from Wilma, a credit customer, whose account had been
written off in 2016.
2
Gary, a credit customer, paid one third of the amount he owed in cash. The balance is
regarded as irrecoverable and should be written off.
3
The provision for doubtful debts should be increased by $150.
4
The discount allowed for July 2018 of $144 should be transferred to the discount allowed
account.
5
The office equipment cost $16 000 and is being depreciated using the straight line (equal
instalment) method at 20% per annum. No office equipment had been bought or sold during
the year.
REQUIRED
(a)
Close the accounts by balancing or by making a transfer to an appropriate account.
Some entries have already been made in the accounts during the year.
Ava
Bad debts recovered account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
………
……………………
……….
………
……………………
…………
………
……………………
……….
………
……………………
…………
………
……………………
……….
………
……………………
…………
Date
Details
$
……….
……………………
…………
Bad debts account
Date
2018
July 1
Details
Total to date
$
218
………
……………………
………. ……….
……………………
…………
………
……………………
………. ……….
……………………
…………
………
……………………
………. ……….
……………………
…………
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
12
Gary account
Date
2018
July 1
Details
$
Date
Details
$
270
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
Balance
b/d
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date
Details
$
Date
2017
……… ……………………… ……… Aug 1
Details
Balance
b/d
$
310
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
Discount allowed account
Date
2018
July 1
Details
$
Date
Details
$
1495
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
……… ……………………… ………
………
……………………
…………
© UCLES 2018
Total to date
0452/13/O/N/18
13
Provision for depreciation of office equipment account
Date
Details
$
Date
2017
Aug 1
Details
$
……….
…………………….. ………..
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
……….
…………………….. ……….. ………
……………………
…………
Balance
b/d
9600
[14]
(b) Name two accounting principles Ava is applying by maintaining a provision for doubtful debts.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................... [2]
Ava allows her trade receivables a credit period of 30 days. She provided the following information.
Trade receivables collection period
At 31 July 2017
32 days
At 31 July 2018
28 days
REQUIRED
(c)
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Ava is proposing to ask clients to pay cash instead of offering credit terms.
(d) Suggest two effects of this proposal.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
14
5
Khalid is a furniture wholesaler. His financial year ends on 30 September.
All purchases and sales are made on credit terms.
Khalid does not maintain a full set of accounting records but was able to provide the following
information.
$
On 1 October 2017
Inventory
Trade receivables
3 100
4 620
During the year ended 30 September 2018
Cheques received from trade receivables
Discount allowed
Bad debts written off
Total purchases
47 970
1 230
115
39 200
On 30 September 2018
Trade receivables
3 305
After the warehouse was closed on 30 September a fire broke out and a quantity of the inventory
was destroyed. The undamaged inventory was valued at $1500.
The profit mark-up is 25%.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the sales for the year ended 30 September 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
15
(b) Prepare an income statement (trading account section) to calculate the value of the inventory
which was destroyed.
Khalid
Income Statement (Trading Account section) for the year ended 30 September 2018
$
$
$
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
………………………………………………… ……………… ………………
………………
[7]
(c) (i)
Calculate the rate of inventory turnover. The calculation should include the total inventory
before the fire broke out on 30 September 2018.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what is measured by the rate of inventory turnover.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
16
Khalid decided that in future he would maintain a full set of double entry records and prepare
control accounts at the end of each month.
REQUIRED
(d) Complete the table by using a tick ( ) to show where each of the following items would appear
debit
credit
opening balance owed to credit suppliers
credit purchases
cheques paid to credit suppliers
cash discount received
contra between sales and purchases ledgers
[5]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
17
6
The financial year of FW Limited ends on 30 September.
The following information is available.
At 1 October 2017
Ordinary share capital of $1 shares
5% Debentures (repayable 2024)
General reserve
Retained earnings
$
100 000
140 000
115 000
117 000
On 30 September 2018
Issue of $1 ordinary shares
Profit for the year
Transfer to general reserve
Payment of ordinary share dividend
$
50 000
28 000
15 000
19 000
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position at 30 September 2018 to show the
equity and reserves and non-current liabilities.
FW Limited
Extract from Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [7]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
18
(b) Define each of the following terms.
i(i) Shareholders
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Limited liability
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) i(i) State one difference between ordinary shares and preference shares.
ordinary shares
preference shares
………………………………………….
………………………………………….
………………………………………….
………………………………………….
[2]
(ii) State two similarities between preference shares and debentures.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
19
The directors of FW Limited want to raise $60 000 to purchase additional premises.
The directors are considering two proposals:
Proposal 1
Issuing 5% debentures (repayable 2030)
Proposal 2
Issuing ordinary shares
It is anticipated that the ordinary share dividend will be 6% per annum.
REQUIRED
(d) State how each proposal would affect the profit of FW Limited in the next financial year (if at
all). Give a reason for your answer in each case.
Proposal 1
Effect on profit ...........................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Proposal 2
Effect on profit ...........................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
[Turn over
20
The following information was available on 30 September 2018.
Inventory
Trade receivables
Trade payables
Cash at bank
Loan repayable on 1 January 2019
$
42 000
34 000
35 000
36 000
30 000
REQUIRED
(e) Calculate the current ratio.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate the effect each
would have on the current ratio.
effect on current ratio
increase
decrease
no effect
use the bank balance to repay the loan
purchase non-current assets on credit
sell half the inventory at cost price to cash
customers
pay amount owed to trade payables by
cheque
[4]
[Total: 23]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0452/13/O/N/18
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 9 0 5 3 7 2 3 0 2 9 *
0452/12
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
February/March 2019
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
DC (RW) 160949/4
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Faraz buys and sells new and used motor vehicles. He purchased a used motor vehicle from
Tahir for $7000 which he paid for by cheque.
How would Faraz record this transaction?
account debited
account credited
A
motor vehicles
bank
B
motor vehicles
Tahir
C
purchases
bank
D
purchases
Tahir
[1]
(b) Kala had the following assets and liabilities on 1 February 2019.
Assets
Liabilities
Non-current assets
Inventory
Trade receivables
$
48 000
14 000
16 500
$
78 500
Trade payables
Bank overdraft
17 000
9 100
26 100
On 2 February she paid Suki, a credit supplier, $1950 by cheque, after deducting a cash
discount of $50.
A
$50 400
B
$50 450
C
$52 350
D
$52 450
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/12/F/M/19
3
(c) Which tasks would be carried out by a book-keeper?
1
analysing business results
2
maintaining a cash book
3
preparing financial statements
4
writing up ledger accounts
A
1 and 2
B
1 and 3
C
2 and 4
D
3 and 4
[1]
(d) Zara provided the following information for the year ended 31 December 2018.
$
Amount owing by credit customers 1 January 2018
2 250
31 December 2018 1 500
Cheques paid by credit customers
14 220
Discount allowed to credit customers
80
Goods returned by credit customers
2 150
How much were the credit sales for the year?
A
$11 400
B
$12 900
C
$15 700
D
$17 200
[1]
(e) Which statement about a bank reconciliation statement is correct?
A
It includes items recorded by the trader not yet recorded by the bank.
B
C
It is sent by the bank to the trader at regular intervals.
D
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
4
(f)
A trader provided the following information for his financial year.
$
Revenue for the year
60 000
Inventory at the start of the year 6 000
Purchases for the year
44 000
The mark-up is 25%.
What was the value of the inventory at the end of the year?
A
$2000
B
$5000
C
$12 000
D
$15 000
[1]
(g)
Which accounting objective is this statement describing?
A
comparability
B
reliability
C
relevance
D
understandability
[1]
(h) A trader provided the following information.
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Expenses
$
48 000
32 000
17 000
What was the profit for the year as a percentage of revenue?
A
15.46%
B
18.75%
C
30.61%
D
35.42%
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/12/F/M/19
5
(i)
(j)
A
delaying payment to credit suppliers
B
obtaining a short-term bank loan
C
selling inventory at cost price
D
selling non-current assets
[1]
Which accounting principle requires profit to be recognised as earned when the legal
ownership of goods passes to the purchaser?
A
going concern
B
money measurement
C
prudence
D
realisation
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
6
2
Gurdeep divides his ledger into three sections – nominal (general) ledger, sales ledger and
purchases ledger.
He prepares monthly control accounts for his sales and purchases ledgers.
REQUIRED
(a) State one advantage of dividing the ledger into these three sections.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Give two
1 ................................................................
2 ................................................................
[2]
(c) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate where each item
debit
credit
no entry
opening balance owed to credit suppliers
credit purchases
cash purchases
cash refund received from a credit supplier
cash discount received from credit suppliers
trade discount received from credit suppliers
interest charged on an overdue account
contra entry to sales ledger control account
[8]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
7
(d)
Sasha. A narrative is required.
Gurdeep
Journal
Debit
$
Credit
$
.........................................................................
........................
........................
.........................................................................
........................
........................
.........................................................................
........................
........................
.........................................................................
........................
........................
[3]
(e)
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f)
Name two accounting principles Gurdeep is applying by maintaining a provision for doubtful
debts.
1 ................................................................
2 ................................................................
[2]
(g) Suggest two
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(h) Name two other
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
8
3
Sarah maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The imprest amount is $250 and this
is restored from the bank account on the first day of each month.
REQUIRED
(a) State two advantages of the imprest system of petty cash.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Sarah had $38 in the petty cash box on 1 January 2019.
The following transactions took place in January 2019.
January 1
6
8
13
18
21
24
Restored petty cash to the imprest amount
Cleaner repaid overpayment made in December
Paid Eva, a credit supplier
Purchase of refreshments for office
Paid Olivia, a credit supplier
Paid for taxi fare
Cost of flowers for office
$
?
10
62
9
43
14
10
REQUIRED
(b)
Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 February 2019.
[11]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
© UCLES 2019
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
Date
Total
received
$
0452/12/F/M/19
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
..........................................
Details
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
Total
paid
$
Sarah
Petty Cash Book
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
Office
expenses
$
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
$
$
...................
Cleaning
Travel
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
...................
Ledger
accounts
$
9
[Turn over
10
(c) Show the entries which would be made in the cleaning account in January 2019.
It is not necessary to total or balance the account.
Sarah
Cleaning account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
..........
..................................
..........
..........
..................................
..........
..........
..................................
..........
..........
..................................
..........
..........
..................................
..........
..........
..................................
..........
[2]
(d) State how the double entry would be completed for the items recorded in the ledger accounts
column of the petty cash book.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) (i)
State the amount which would be received on 1 February when the petty cash is restored
to the imprest amount.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the double entry which would be made on 1 February for restoring the imprest
amount.
debit
credit
..........................................
..........................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
11
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
12
4
The W Athletics Club had the following assets and liabilities on 1 March 2018.
Balance at bank
Equipment at valuation
Subscriptions accrued
Accumulated fund
Loan
Subscriptions prepaid
$
4105
4500
550
6880
2000
275
The treasurer prepared the following receipts and payments account for the year ended
28 February 2019.
W Athletics Club
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 28 February 2019
Opening bank balance
Subscriptions received
$
4 105
5 940
Repayment of loan
Loan interest
Equipment purchased
General expenses
Rent and insurance
Net cost of competitions
Closing bank balance
10 045
$
2 000
100
1 650
890
4 280
310
815
10 045
The following additional information is available at 28 February 2019.
Insurance prepaid
General expenses accrued
Subscriptions prepaid
Equipment at valuation
$
240
30
165
5900
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the subscriptions for the year ended 28 February 2019.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
13
(b) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 28 February 2019.
W Athletics Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 28 February 2019
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [9]
(c) (i)
List two items included in the receipts and payments account which should not appear
in the income and expenditure account.
1 ....................................................................................................
2 ....................................................................................................
(ii)
[2]
List two items included in the income and expenditure account which should not appear
in the receipts and payments account.
1 ....................................................................................................
2 ....................................................................................................
[2]
(d) State the amount of subscriptions that should be included in the statement of financial position
at 28 February 2019.
State whether it is an asset or a liability.
Amount .........................................................
Asset or liability .............................................
[2]
(e) State the amount of the accumulated fund that should appear in the statement of financial
position at 28 February 2019.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
14
5
Hari is a manufacturer of food for farm animals.
REQUIRED
(a) State the meaning of the following terms used in the financial statements of a manufacturing
business.
(i)
Prime cost
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Cost of production
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Work in progress
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
He provided the following information for the year ended 31 December 2018.
Purchases of raw materials
Carriage on raw materials
Factory wages – direct
indirect
Factory rent, rates and insurance
Factory machinery at cost
Provision for depreciation of factory machinery 1 January 2018
Factory loose tools at valuation 1 January 2018
$
142 500
1 680
86 250
42 570
14 000
95 000
34 200
7 140
Additional information
1
The inventory of raw materials at 1 January 2018 was $13 500 which was $700 lower than
the inventory of raw materials on 31 December 2018.
2
The inventory of work in progress at 1 January 2018 was $15 100 which was $900 higher
than the inventory of work in progress at 31 December 2018.
3
At 31 December 2018 factory insurance prepaid amounted to $690 and factory rent, $1500,
was accrued.
4
The factory machinery is being depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing (diminishing)
balance method.
5
The factory loose tools were valued at $6310 on 31 December 2018.
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
15
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 December 2018.
Hari
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 December 2018
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [13]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
16
The following information is available.
Inventory of finished goods on 1 January 2018
Inventory of finished goods on 31 December 2018
Cost of goods sold for the year ended 31 December 2018
$
24 000
22 200
302 800
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate the rate of inventory turnover of finished goods.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) (i)
Complete the following sentence.
Hari should always value his inventory at the lower of ......................................................
and ......................................................
(ii)
[1]
Name one accounting principle Hari is applying by valuing his inventory on this basis.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate the effect of Hari
overvaluing his inventory of raw materials at 31 December 2018.
The first one has been completed as an example.
overstated
understated
Cost of materials consumed for the year ended
31 December 2018
Cost of production for the year ended
31 December 2018
Gross profit for the year ended 31 December 2018
Current assets at 31 December 2018
Profit for the year ending 31 December 2019
[4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
17
(f)
Suggest two ways in which Hari could increase his gross profit.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 26]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
18
6
The financial year of B Limited ends on 31 December. The company obtained its long-term finance
from the issue of 5% debentures, 6% preference shares and ordinary shares.
REQUIRED
(a) State the meaning of the following terms used in connection with limited companies.
(i)
Called-up share capital
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Paid-up share capital
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Limited liability
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to select the source of long-term
finance to which each statement relates.
The first one has been completed as an example.
debentures
preference
shares
ordinary
shares
The holders receive dividend before
ordinary share dividend.
They are a long-term loan.
The holders are entitled to vote at the
annual general meeting.
The holders receive a variable rate of
dividend.
The holders receive a fixed rate of
dividend.
If the company is wound up the holders
are repaid after all other investors.
[5]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
19
(c) State two similarities between debentures and preference shares.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Complete the table by placing tick(s) ( ) in the correct columns to indicate where each of the
following would be included in the financial statements of B Limited at 31 December 2018.
The first one has been completed as an example.
Income
statement
Statement
of changes
in equity
Statement
of financial
position
No entry
Half year interest on debentures paid on
1 July 2018
Half-year interest on debentures owing
on 31 December 2018
Payment of interim ordinary share
dividend on 1 July 2018
Payment of final ordinary share dividend
for the year ended 31 December 2017
Proposed ordinary share dividend at
31 December 2018
Creation of general reserve
[7]
The directors of B Limited are hoping to expand the business and have estimated that $30 000 will
be required.
One director has proposed that the bank should be asked to provide overdraft facilities up to
$30 000.
Another director has proposed making a further issue of 5% debentures.
REQUIRED
(e) Suggest two reasons why the proposal to ask for overdraft facilities should not be accepted.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
[Turn over
20
(f)
Complete the table to indicate how each value would change if an issue of 5% debentures
was made on 1 January 2019.
Where there is no effect place a tick (
The first one has been completed as an example.
increase
$
total of current assets at 1 January 2019
decrease
$
no effect
30 000
total equity at 1 January 2019
total of non-current liabilities at 1 January 2019
total profit for the year ending 31 December 2019
[3]
[Total: 22]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/F/M/19
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 0 9 5 1 5 2 9 2 3 0 *
0452/11
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
May/June 2019
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 22 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (ST) 169004/1
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) The employees of a business are highly skilled but this is not recorded in the financial
statements of the business.
Which accounting principle is being applied?
A
going concern
B
money measurement
C
prudence
D
realisation
[1]
(b) Khalid started a business on 1 April 2018 with a capital of $90 000.
He provided the following information on 31 March 2019.
non-current assets
current assets
current liabilities
drawings during the year
$
75 000
32 000
24 000
19 000
What was the profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 2019?
A
$12 000 loss
B
$12 000 profit
C
$26 000 loss
D
$26 000 profit
[1]
(c) How is cost of production calculated?
A
direct materials + direct labour + direct expenses
B
direct materials + direct labour + direct expenses + factory overheads
C
direct materials + direct labour + direct expenses + factory overheads
+ decrease in work in progress
D
direct materials + direct labour + direct expenses + factory overheads
– decrease in work in progress
[1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
3
(d) Lisa returned goods previously purchased from Tara.
How did Tara record this?
account debited
account credited
A
Lisa
purchases returns
B
Lisa
sales returns
C
purchases returns
Lisa
D
sales returns
Lisa
[1]
(e) When preparing his financial statements for the year ended 30 April 2019 Tebogo recorded
his opening inventory of $6400 as $4600 in error.
What was the effect of this error?
effect on gross profit for
the year
overstated
understated
effect on profit for the
year
overstated
understated
effect on capital at
30 April 2019
overstated
understated
A
B
C
D
[1]
(f)
Amrik started a business on 1 January 2017 and purchased a machine costing $18 000.
He decided to depreciate the machine at 20% per annum using the reducing (diminishing)
balance method. No depreciation was to be charged in the year of disposal.
The machine was sold for $13 300 on 1 July 2018.
What was the profit or loss on the sale of the machine?
A
loss $1100
B
loss $4700
C
profit $1780
D
profit $2500
[1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
4
(g) ‘Financial information must be free from errors and bias.’
To which accounting objective does this refer?
A
comparability
B
relevance
C
reliability
D
understandability
[1]
(h) Amelia rented premises to a tenant. At the end of Amelia’s financial year the tenant had paid
2 months’ rent in advance.
Which entries would Amelia make in her ledger?
A
credit the rent payable account and carry down as a debit balance
B
debit the rent payable account and carry down as a credit balance
C
credit the rent receivable account and carry down as a debit balance
D
debit the rent receivable account and carry down as a credit balance
[1]
(i)
John paid Tahir, a credit supplier, $200 by cheque. This was credited to the account of Tarek,
another credit supplier.
Which journal entry corrects this error?
debit
$
400
A
suspense
Tahir
Tarek
B
Tahir
Tarek
200
C
Tahir
Tarek
suspense
200
200
Tarek
Tahir
200
D
credit
$
200
200
200
400
200
[1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
5
(j)
A business provided the following information.
opening inventory
closing inventory
purchases
revenue
$
36 000
24 000
360 000
480 000
What was the rate of inventory turnover?
A
12.0 times
B
12.4 times
C
15.5 times
D
16.0 times
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
6
2
Olivia is a trader. Sales and purchases are made on both cash and credit terms. Olivia maintains
a full set of accounting records and prepares control accounts at the end of each month.
REQUIRED
(a) Name the book of prime (original) entry which Olivia would use to obtain the following
information when preparing her control accounts.
book of prime (original) entry
returns to credit suppliers
cheques received from credit customers
contra entry
bad debts written off
[4]
(b) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate where each item
would appear in Olivia’s sales ledger control account.
If the item does not appear place a tick ( ) in the ‘no entry’ column.
debit
credit
no entry
credit sales
cash sales
cash refund to credit customer
cash discount allowed by credit suppliers
contra entry
trade discount allowed to credit customers
interest charged on credit customer’s overdue account
[7]
(c) State the meaning of the following terms.
(i)
Bad debt
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Bad debt recovered
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
7
(iii)
Provision for doubtful debts
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Olivia’s financial year ends on 30 April.
On 30 April 2019 Olivia received $200 in cash from Ben, a credit customer, in final settlement of
the amount he owed. The balance of Ben’s account was written off as irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(d) Complete the following accounts in Olivia’s ledger for the year ended 30 April 2019. Show
any necessary year-end transfer.
Olivia
Ben account
Date
2019
Jan 2
Details
Sales
$
Date
2019
Details
$
360
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
Bad debts account
Date
2019
Details
$
Date
2019
Details
$
384
.............
.................................
..............
April 30
Total to date
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
.............
.................................
..............
[4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
8
Olivia maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of the trade receivables at the end of each
financial year.
On 30 April 2018 the trade receivables amounted to $13 500.
On 30 April 2019 the trade receivables amounted to $12 800 after writing off Ben’s account.
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 30 April 2019. Balance
the account and bring down the balance on 1 May 2019.
Olivia
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
............
................................
.............
.............
................................
.............
[4]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
9
3
Kadar is a food wholesaler. He maintains a full set of accounting records and prepares a trial
balance at the end of each financial year.
REQUIRED
(a) State two reasons why a trial balance is prepared.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Name three types of error which are not revealed by a trial balance.
Give an example of each.
1
Type of error .............................................
Example ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2
Type of error .............................................
Example ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
3
Type of error .............................................
Example ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[6]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
10
Kadar provided the following information at the end of his financial year on 31 March 2019.
Revenue
Purchases
Sales returns
Carriage outwards
Fixtures and fittings (at cost)
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings
Motor vehicle (at cost)
Discount allowed
Discount received
Trade payables
Trade receivables
Operating expenses
Rent payable
Commission receivable
Bank overdraft
Capital
Inventory 1 April 2018
Inventory 31 March 2019
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
$
146 000
137 300
1 400
2 970
45 000
18 000
16 850
190
230
14 600
12 900
17 190
5 200
2 000
5 170
65 000
12 000
10 950
11
(c) Prepare the trial balance of Kadar at 31 March 2019.
Kadar
Trial Balance at 31 March 2019
Debit
$
Credit
$
Revenue
........................
........................
Purchases
........................
........................
Sales returns
........................
........................
Carriage outwards
........................
........................
Fixtures and fittings (at cost)
........................
........................
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings
........................
........................
Motor vehicle (at cost)
........................
........................
Discount allowed
........................
........................
Discount received
........................
........................
Trade payables
........................
........................
Trade receivables
........................
........................
Operating expenses
........................
........................
Rent payable
........................
........................
Commission receivable
........................
........................
Bank overdraft
........................
........................
Capital
........................
........................
Inventory
........................
........................
…………………………
........................
........................
........................
........................
[9]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
12
Kadar purchased the motor vehicle on 30 March 2019. He entered the total amount paid in the
motor vehicle account. The total paid consisted of the following.
$
16 000
420
350
80
16 850
cost of motor vehicle
1 year’s insurance
delivery charge
fuel
REQUIRED
(d) State whether each cost is capital expenditure or revenue expenditure.
Give a reason for your answers.
The first item has been completed as an example.
cost
cost of motor vehicle
type of expenditure
capital
reason
This is the cost of purchasing a non-current
asset which will be kept for over 12 months
1 year’s insurance
delivery charge
fuel
[6]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
13
4
The YK Club was formed some years ago. In addition to providing sporting facilities for members,
the club also has a shop selling sports clothing.
The following information was available for the year ended 31 January 2019.
$
On 1 February 2018
Shop inventory
Amount owing for shop supplies
896
420
For the year ended 31 January 2019
Payments for shop supplies
4150
On 31 January 2019
Shop inventory
Amount owing for shop supplies
960
470
All goods are marked up by 25%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the shop income statement for the year ended 31 January 2019 showing the revenue
for the year.
YK Club
Shop Income Statement for the year ended 31 January 2019
$
$
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
..........................................................................................
........................
........................
[5]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
14
(b) Complete the table to indicate how the following items would be recorded in the financial
statements of the YK Club for the year ended 31 January 2019.
Some items may appear in more than one financial statement.
The first one has been completed as an example.
balance at bank on 1 February 2018
$
receipts and
payments
account
$
460
460
insurance paid on 1 February 2018 for
18 months to 31 July 2019
1080
purchase of new sports equipment by
cheque on 31 December 2018
3500
subscriptions received in January 2019
for the year ending 31 January 2020
350
accumulated depreciation of sports
equipment at 31 January 2019
850
cost of sports equipment at
31 January 2019
profit from club shop for the year ended
31 January 2019 (calculated in (a))
bank overdraft on 31 January 2019
income and
expenditure
account
$
statement
of financial
position
$
8500
?
1250
[11]
The treasurer is concerned that the overdraft of the YK Club is increasing each year. He has
recommended that the club should hold fund-raising activities to reduce the club’s bank overdraft.
REQUIRED
(c) Suggest two other ways in which the bank overdraft of the club could be reduced.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
15
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
16
5
Krishna has a secretarial agency. Her financial year ends on 30 April.
She provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2019.
Fees received from clients
Wages
Operating expenses
Rent and rates
Motor expenses
Commission receivable
Office fixtures and equipment at valuation 1 May 2018
Motor vehicle at cost
Provision for depreciation of motor vehicle
$
35 270
24 300
4 260
7 750
720
1 820
18 900
17 500
6 300
Additional information
1
At 30 April 2019
Clients owed fees totalling $2150.
Commission receivable accrued amounted to $60.
Rent, $1200, was accrued.
Rates prepaid amounted to $550.
2
Krishna lives in an apartment above the business premises. One quarter of the rent and rates
relates to Krishna’s apartment.
3
The office fixtures and equipment were valued at $17 320 on 30 April 2019.
No office fixtures and equipment were purchased or sold during the year.
4
The motor vehicle is to be depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing (diminishing)
balance method.
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
17
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Krishna’s income statement for the year ended 30 April 2019.
Krishna
Income Statement for the year ended 30 April 2019
$
$
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
[13]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
18
(b) Complete the following accounts in Krishna’s ledger for the year ended 30 April 2019.
Close the accounts by balancing or by making an appropriate year-end transfer.
Krishna
Drawings account
Date
2019
April 30
Total cash drawings
.............
Details
$
Date
Details
$
9 150
.............
....................................
..............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
Details
$
Capital account
Date
Details
$
.............
....................................
..............
Date
2018
May 1
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
Balance b/d
38 000
[5]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
19
Krishna is considering purchasing business premises costing $80 000. She could invest a further
$40 000 as capital. The remaining $40 000 would have to come from a 6% bank loan repayable
after 5 years.
REQUIRED
(c) Explain three factors Krishna should consider when making a decision about purchasing
these business premises.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[6]
[Total: 24]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
20
6
ML Limited was formed some years ago. The company’s share capital consists entirely of ordinary
shares.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate whether each
statement is true or false.
The first one has been completed as an example.
True
False
The reward given to ordinary shareholders for investing in the
company is known as a dividend.
The amount of issued shares for which payment has been received
by the company from shareholders is known as paid-up share
capital.
Ordinary shareholders receive a fixed percentage of the profit each
year.
In the event of the company being wound up the ordinary shares
are the last to be repaid.
Ordinary shareholders are personally liable for the debts of the
company.
Any ordinary share dividend paid during the financial year is
entered in the statement of changes of equity irrespective of the
year to which it relates.
[5]
The financial year of ML Limited ends on 31 December. The following information is available.
$
At 1 January 2018
Ordinary share capital
Retained earnings
General reserve
200 000
16 500
8 000
Dividends paid during the year ended 31 December 2018
Final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2017
Interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2018
Profit for the year ended 31 December 2018
8 000
6 000
28 000
On 31 December 2018 it was decided to make a transfer to general reserve of $3000.
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
21
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare a statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018.
ML Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 December 2018
Ordinary
share
capital
$
Retained
earnings
General
reserve
Total
$
$
$
On 1 January 2018
....................... ....................... ....................... .......................
Profit for the year
....................... ....................... ....................... .......................
Dividend paid – final
....................... ....................... ....................... .......................
interim
....................... ....................... ....................... .......................
Transfer to general reserve
....................... ....................... ....................... .......................
On 31 December 2018
....................... ....................... ....................... .......................
[6]
(c) Calculate the percentage (%) total ordinary share dividend for the year ended
31 December 2018.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
The directors of ML Limited want to expand the company and need to raise $100 000. They are
considering issuing either 6% preference shares or 5% debentures.
REQUIRED
(d) State three features of preference shares.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
[Turn over
22
(e) State three features of debentures.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(f)
Complete the table to indicate the effect of raising the funds from an issue of 5% debentures
on 1 January 2019.
Where there is no effect place a tick ( ) in the ‘no effect’ column.
The first one has been completed as an example.
increase
$
effect on balance at bank
decrease
$
no effect
100 000
effect on non-current liabilities
effect on working capital
effect on equity at 1 January 2019
effect on annual profits
[4]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/M/J/19
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 0 7 9 0 0 4 7 7 0 *
0452/12
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
May/June 2019
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 22 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (ST) 169003/2
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) An invoice for the purchase of goods on credit, $980, was incorrectly recorded in the
purchases journal as $890.
Which type of error was made?
A
commission
B
complete reversal
C
original entry
D
principle
[1]
(b) Which accounts would appear in a purchases ledger?
1
carriage inwards
2
purchases
3
purchases returns
4
Sadie, a credit supplier
A
1, 2 and 3
B
2 and 3 only
C
2 only
D
4 only
[1]
(c) Bingwa purchased premises costing $85 000 in February 2018. Identical premises to those
owned by Bingwa were sold in April 2019 for $98 000. No adjustment was made in Bingwa’s
accounting records in April 2019.
Which accounting principle did Bingwa apply?
A
business entity
B
materiality
C
money measurement
D
realisation
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/12/M/J/19
3
(d) Jason provided the following information.
non-current assets
inventory
insurance prepaid
trade payables
petty cash
rent receivable prepaid
bank overdraft
trade receivables
$
103 650
4 960
130
5 380
100
240
2 900
5 120
How much was Jason’s capital?
A
$105 440
B
$105 920
C
$105 960
D
$111 240
[1]
(e) On 1 February Ahmed purchased goods on credit from Zaffar. He returned these goods on
8 February.
How did Zaffar record the transaction of 8 February?
account debited
(f)
account credited
A
Ahmed
purchases returns
B
Ahmed
sales returns
C
purchases returns
Ahmed
D
sales returns
Ahmed
[1]
Athena is both a customer and a supplier of Heidi. Athena’s account in Heidi’s sales ledger
showed a debit balance of $340 and her account in Heidi’s purchases ledger showed a credit
balance of $260.
A contra between the two accounts was agreed.
Which entry would Heidi make in her sales ledger control account?
A
credit $80
B
credit $260
C
debit $80
D
debit $260
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
4
(g) An advertising expenses account had a credit balance of $100 on 1 January 2018.
During the year ended 31 December 2018 advertising expenses paid totalled $2830.
This included $45 for the following financial year.
Which journal entry is required to transfer the advertising expenses to the income statement
on 31 December 2018?
debit
$
A
advertising expenses
income statement
2685
B
advertising expenses
income statement
2885
C
income statement
advertising expenses
2685
D
income statement
advertising expenses
2885
credit
$
2685
2885
2685
2885
[1]
(h) How is mark-up calculated?
(i)
A
cost of sales
gross profit
B
gross profit
cost of sales
C
gross profit
revenue
D
revenue
gross profit
[1]
On 1 May 2018 Ben’s capital was $47 600.
During the year ended 30 April 2019 he introduced his personal motor vehicle, $12 500, into
the business. His drawings during the year ended 30 April 2019 were $7500.
On 30 April 2019 Ben’s capital was $51 250.
What was Ben’s profit or loss for the year?
A
loss $1350
B
loss $8650
C
profit $1350
D
profit $8650
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/12/M/J/19
5
(j)
Amber updated her cash book after receiving her bank statement. The updated cash book
balance was an overdraft of $250.
The bank statement did not include cheques not presented, $96, and amounts not credited,
$183.
What was the balance shown on the bank statement?
A
$163 credit
B
$163 debit
C
$337 credit
D
$337 debit
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
6
2
Nabil owns a food store. He purchases goods on credit terms and sells on cash terms.
Nabil’s financial year ends on 31 March.
Nabil’s receipts and payments during the year ended 31 March 2019 included both capital and
revenue items.
REQUIRED
(a) State whether each of the following represents capital expenditure, revenue expenditure, a
capital receipt or a revenue receipt.
The first one has been completed as an example.
Payment of annual insurance premium
revenue expenditure
Purchases of goods for resale
..................................................
Proceeds of sale of old shop fittings at book value
..................................................
Cost of new shop fittings
..................................................
Delivery charge on new shop fittings
..................................................
Cash sales
..................................................
Loan from bank
..................................................
[6]
(b) Complete the table by stating the double entry needed to record each of the following
transactions which took place in March 2019.
transaction
account(s) debited
$
account(s) credited
$
Nabil transferred his private motor
vehicle, $18 000, to the business.
Purchased stationery, $44, on credit from
Tahir.
Paid office cash, $490, into the business
bank account.
Settled Vijay’s account of $200 by
bank transfer after deducting 2% cash
discount.
[9]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
7
Nabil prepares a trial balance at the end of each financial year.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate where the balance of
each of the accounts would appear in Nabil’s trial balance on 31 March 2019.
The first one has been completed as an example.
debit
column
credit
column
rent and rates
capital
motor vehicle at cost
motor expenses
purchases returns
discount received
Tarek, a credit supplier
insurance
bank overdraft
operating expenses
5-year bank loan
drawings
carriage outwards
[6]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
8
3
Hamila is a trader. Her financial year ends on 28 February. All goods are bought and sold on credit
terms.
Hamila provided the following information for February 2019.
2019
February
1
Safiya, a credit customer, owed $320
12
Safiya paid the balance due on 1 February by cheque
16
Safiya purchased goods on credit, list price $250, less 20% trade discount
18
The bank returned Safiya’s cheque because of insufficient funds in the account
24
Safiya paid $400 in cash
27
The balance of Safiya’s account was written off as irrecoverable
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the account of Safiya as it would appear in Hamila’s ledger for the month of
February 2019.
Hamila
Safiya account
Date
2019
Details
$
Date
2019
Details
$
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
[6]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
9
(b) Complete the bad debts account in Hamila’s ledger for the month of February 2019.
Close the account by making an appropriate year-end transfer.
Hamila
Bad debts account
Date
2019
Feb 27
Details
Total to date
$
Date
2019
Details
$
674
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
[2]
Hamila maintains a provision for doubtful debts. The following account appeared in Hamila’s
ledger.
Hamila
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date
2019
Feb 28
Details
Income statement
Balance c/d
$
130
Date
2018
Mar 1
Details
Balance b/d
1370
1500
$
1500
1500
REQUIRED
(c) (i)
Explain the following entries in the provision for doubtful debts account.
Name the account in which the double entry would be made for each item.
State whether the account would be debited or credited.
1 March 2018 Balance b/d
Explanation .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Name of account ...............................................................................................................
Debit or credit .......................................
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
10
28 February 2019 Balance c/d
Explanation .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Name of account ...............................................................................................................
Debit or credit .......................................
[4]
(ii)
Explain the following entry in the provision for doubtful debts account.
28 February 2019 Income statement
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Explain how Hamila is applying the principle of prudence by maintaining a provision for
doubtful debts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Explain how Hamila is applying the principle of accruals (matching) by maintaining a provision
for doubtful debts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Suggest two ways in which Hamila could reduce the possibility of bad debts.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
11
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
12
4
Sam’s financial year ends on 31 December.
On 1 November 2017 he sold old office equipment for $1900.
The equipment had been purchased on 1 April 2015 for $4000 and had been depreciated using
the reducing (diminishing) balance method at 20% per annum. A full year’s depreciation was
charged in the year of purchase, but no depreciation was to be charged in the year of disposal.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the profit or loss on disposal of the office equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
On 1 January 2018 Sam purchased new office equipment costing $8000 on credit from C Limited.
(b) Prepare a journal entry to record this purchase.
A narrative is required.
Sam
General Journal
Date
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
2018
[3]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
13
The new office equipment was expected to be used for 5 years and have a residual value of
$2000.
Sam was undecided about which method of depreciation to use for the new office equipment.
REQUIRED
(c) (i)
Calculate the annual depreciation on the new office equipment using the straight-line
(equal instalment) method.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the depreciation for the first year on the new office equipment using the
reducing (diminishing) balance method at 20% per annum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Sam decided to use the reducing (diminishing) balance method of depreciation.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare a journal entry to record the transfer to the income statement of the depreciation on
office equipment for the year ended 31 December 2018.
A narrative is required.
Sam
General Journal
Date
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
2018
[3]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
14
Sam’s book-keeper started to maintain a petty cash book on 1 April 2019. On that date $150 was
placed in the petty cash box. This was to be the monthly imprest which was to be restored on the
first day of each month.
At the end of April 2019 Sam discovered that only a few entries had been made in the petty cash
book for the month.
The following information about the petty cash transactions for April 2019 is available.
2019
April
$
11
Received refund from cleaner for overpayment in March
5
18
Paid Kelly, a credit supplier
35
21
Bought printer paper
23
30
Paid cleaner
56
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the entries for the transactions on 3 April and 6 April in the petty cash book on the
page opposite.
Enter the transactions for 11 April to 30 April in the petty cash book.
Balance the petty cash book on 30 April and bring down the balance on 1 May 2019.
Show the restoration of the imprest on 1 May 2019.
[10]
[Total: 24]
The petty cash book is printed on the next page
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
© UCLES 2019
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
6
..................
..................
3
April 1
2019
Date
..................
150
Total
received
$
0452/12/M/J/19
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
Parcel post
Taxi fare
Cash
Details
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
3
12
..................
Total
paid
$
Sam – Petty Cash Book
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Office
expenses
$
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
$
$
..................
Cleaning
Travel
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Ledger
accounts
$
15
[Turn over
16
5
Mostafa and Salma are partners in a wholesale business. Their financial year ends on 30 April.
When they started the business they drew up a partnership agreement. The terms of the agreement
included the following.
interest to be allowed on capital at 5% per annum
interest to be charged on drawings at 6%
Mostafa to be entitled to an annual salary of $12 000
residual profits and losses to be shared in the ratio of 3 : 2.
The partners provided the following information.
At 1 May 2018
Capital account
Current account
Mostafa
$
45 000
3 250 credit
Salma
$
25 000
1 920 debit
On 1 February 2019 the partners agreed that Mostafa’s salary should be increased to $15 000 per
annum.
For the year ended 30 April 2019
Drawings
Mostafa
$
10 000
Salma
$
8 000
The profit for the year ended 30 April 2019 was $14 820.
REQUIRED
(a) Suggest one reason why interest on capital was included in the partnership agreement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest one reason why interest on drawings was included in the partnership agreement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Suggest one reason why a salary for Mostafa was included in the partnership agreement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
17
(d) Prepare the profit and loss appropriation account for the year ended 30 April 2019.
Mostafa and Salma
Profit and Loss Appropriation Account for the year ended 30 April 2019
$
$
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
[8]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
18
(e) Complete the current account of Mostafa for the year ended 30 April 2019. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 May 2019.
Mostafa and Salma
Mostafa Current account
Date
Details
$
.............
....................................
..............
Date
2018
May 1
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
Details
Balance b/d
$
3 250
[5]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
19
6
S Limited was formed on 1 May 2018. On that date the company issued ordinary shares and 5%
debentures.
At the end of the financial year on 30 April 2019 the following financial statements were prepared:
Income statement
Statement of changes in equity
Statement of financial position
REQUIRED
(a) Name the financial statement in which each of the following items would appear.
Some items may appear in more than one statement.
If the item does not appear in any of the financial statements write ‘No entry’.
The first one has been completed as an example.
financial statement
Wages accrued at 30 April 2019
Income statement
Statement of financial position
Ordinary share capital
Creation of general reserve
Payment of interim ordinary share dividend
on 31 October 2018
Proposed ordinary share dividend at
30 April 2019
Debenture interest accrued on 30 April 2019
[8]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
20
The directors of S Limited wish to raise funds for expansion. They are undecided whether to issue
additional ordinary shares or additional 5% debentures.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate whether each
statement is true or false.
The first one has been completed as an example.
true
false
debenture holders receive interest
debenture holders receive a variable rate of interest
debentures are usually included in the non-current
liabilities section of the statement of financial position
debentures have a prior claim in the event of the
company being wound up
debenture holders are entitled to vote at the annual
general meeting
debentures are often secured on the non-current
assets of the company
[5]
(c) Suggest two ways in which the ordinary shareholders may be affected if the directors decide
to raise funds from an issue of debentures.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
The directors of S Limited are concerned about the working capital of the company at the end of
the first year of trading.
The following information is available at 30 April 2019.
Inventory
Trade payables
Trade receivables
Bank overdraft
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
$
27 400
28 700
25 200
10 800
21
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate the current ratio.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Calculate the quick ratio.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Explain why the quick ratio is more reliable than the current ratio as an indicator of liquidity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(g) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to show how each of the
following would affect the working capital of S Limited.
increase
decrease
no effect
issue additional debentures
pay operating expenses by cheque
sell goods for cash instead of on credit
delay paying credit suppliers
sell unused non-current assets
reduce credit period for credit customers
[6]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
[Turn over
22
(h) Suggest two problems the directors of S Limited may encounter if the working capital is
inadequate.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 29]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/M/J/19
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 6 6 9 7 8 8 3 5 6 9 *
0452/13
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
May/June 2019
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 22 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (MM) 181611
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) An invoice for the purchase of goods on credit, $980, was incorrectly recorded in the
purchases journal as $890.
Which type of error was made?
A
commission
B
complete reversal
C
original entry
D
principle
[1]
(b) Which accounts would appear in a purchases ledger?
1
carriage inwards
2
purchases
3
purchases returns
4
Sadie, a credit supplier
A
1, 2 and 3
B
2 and 3 only
C
2 only
D
4 only
[1]
(c) Bingwa purchased premises costing $85 000 in February 2018. Identical premises to those
owned by Bingwa were sold in April 2019 for $98 000. No adjustment was made in Bingwa’s
accounting records in April 2019.
Which accounting principle did Bingwa apply?
A
business entity
B
materiality
C
money measurement
D
realisation
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/13/M/J/19
3
(d) Jason provided the following information.
non-current assets
inventory
insurance prepaid
trade payables
petty cash
rent receivable prepaid
bank overdraft
trade receivables
$
103 650
4 960
130
5 380
100
240
2 900
5 120
How much was Jason’s capital?
A
$105 440
B
$105 920
C
$105 960
D
$111 240
[1]
(e) On 1 February Ahmed purchased goods on credit from Zaffar. He returned these goods on
8 February.
How did Zaffar record the transaction of 8 February?
account debited
(f)
account credited
A
Ahmed
purchases returns
B
Ahmed
sales returns
C
purchases returns
Ahmed
D
sales returns
Ahmed
[1]
Athena is both a customer and a supplier of Heidi. Athena’s account in Heidi’s sales ledger
showed a debit balance of $340 and her account in Heidi’s purchases ledger showed a credit
balance of $260.
A contra between the two accounts was agreed.
Which entry would Heidi make in her sales ledger control account?
A
credit $80
B
credit $260
C
debit $80
D
debit $260
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
4
(g) An advertising expenses account had a credit balance of $100 on 1 January 2018.
During the year ended 31 December 2018 advertising expenses paid totalled $2830.
This included $45 for the following financial year.
Which journal entry is required to transfer the advertising expenses to the income statement
on 31 December 2018?
debit
$
A
advertising expenses
income statement
2685
B
advertising expenses
income statement
2885
C
income statement
advertising expenses
2685
D
income statement
advertising expenses
2885
credit
$
2685
2885
2685
2885
[1]
(h) How is mark-up calculated?
(i)
A
cost of sales
gross profit
B
gross profit
cost of sales
C
gross profit
revenue
D
revenue
gross profit
[1]
On 1 May 2018 Ben’s capital was $47 600.
During the year ended 30 April 2019 he introduced his personal motor vehicle, $12 500, into
the business. His drawings during the year ended 30 April 2019 were $7500.
On 30 April 2019 Ben’s capital was $51 250.
What was Ben’s profit or loss for the year?
A
loss $1350
B
loss $8650
C
profit $1350
D
profit $8650
© UCLES 2019
[1]
0452/13/M/J/19
5
(j)
Amber updated her cash book after receiving her bank statement. The updated cash book
balance was an overdraft of $250.
The bank statement did not include cheques not presented, $96, and amounts not credited,
$183.
What was the balance shown on the bank statement?
A
$163 credit
B
$163 debit
C
$337 credit
D
$337 debit
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
6
2
Nabil owns a food store. He purchases goods on credit terms and sells on cash terms.
Nabil’s financial year ends on 31 March.
Nabil’s receipts and payments during the year ended 31 March 2019 included both capital and
revenue items.
REQUIRED
(a) State whether each of the following represents capital expenditure, revenue expenditure, a
capital receipt or a revenue receipt.
The first one has been completed as an example.
Payment of annual insurance premium
revenue expenditure
Purchases of goods for resale
..................................................
Proceeds of sale of old shop fittings at book value
..................................................
Cost of new shop fittings
..................................................
Delivery charge on new shop fittings
..................................................
Cash sales
..................................................
Loan from bank
..................................................
[6]
(b) Complete the table by stating the double entry needed to record each of the following
transactions which took place in March 2019.
transaction
account(s) debited
$
account(s) credited
$
Nabil transferred his private motor
vehicle, $18 000, to the business.
Purchased stationery, $44, on credit from
Tahir.
Paid office cash, $490, into the business
bank account.
Settled Vijay’s account of $200 by
bank transfer after deducting 2% cash
discount.
[9]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
7
Nabil prepares a trial balance at the end of each financial year.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate where the balance of
each of the accounts would appear in Nabil’s trial balance on 31 March 2019.
The first one has been completed as an example.
debit
column
credit
column
rent and rates
capital
motor vehicle at cost
motor expenses
purchases returns
discount received
Tarek, a credit supplier
insurance
bank overdraft
operating expenses
5-year bank loan
drawings
carriage outwards
[6]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
8
3
Hamila is a trader. Her financial year ends on 28 February. All goods are bought and sold on credit
terms.
Hamila provided the following information for February 2019.
2019
February
1
Safiya, a credit customer, owed $320
12
Safiya paid the balance due on 1 February by cheque
16
Safiya purchased goods on credit, list price $250, less 20% trade discount
18
The bank returned Safiya’s cheque because of insufficient funds in the account
24
Safiya paid $400 in cash
27
The balance of Safiya’s account was written off as irrecoverable
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the account of Safiya as it would appear in Hamila’s ledger for the month of
February 2019.
Hamila
Safiya account
Date
2019
Details
$
Date
2019
Details
$
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
[6]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
9
(b) Complete the bad debts account in Hamila’s ledger for the month of February 2019.
Close the account by making an appropriate year-end transfer.
Hamila
Bad debts account
Date
2019
Feb 27
Details
Total to date
$
Date
2019
Details
$
674
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
[2]
Hamila maintains a provision for doubtful debts. The following account appeared in Hamila’s
ledger.
Hamila
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date
2019
Feb 28
Details
Income statement
Balance c/d
$
130
Date
2018
Mar 1
Details
Balance b/d
1370
1500
$
1500
1500
REQUIRED
(c) (i)
Explain the following entries in the provision for doubtful debts account.
Name the account in which the double entry would be made for each item.
State whether the account would be debited or credited.
1 March 2018 Balance b/d
Explanation .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Name of account ...............................................................................................................
Debit or credit .......................................
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
10
28 February 2019 Balance c/d
Explanation .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Name of account ...............................................................................................................
Debit or credit .......................................
[4]
(ii)
Explain the following entry in the provision for doubtful debts account.
28 February 2019 Income statement
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Explain how Hamila is applying the principle of prudence by maintaining a provision for
doubtful debts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Explain how Hamila is applying the principle of accruals (matching) by maintaining a provision
for doubtful debts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Suggest two ways in which Hamila could reduce the possibility of bad debts.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
11
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
12
4
Sam’s financial year ends on 31 December.
On 1 November 2017 he sold old office equipment for $1900.
The equipment had been purchased on 1 April 2015 for $4000 and had been depreciated using
the reducing (diminishing) balance method at 20% per annum. A full year’s depreciation was
charged in the year of purchase, but no depreciation was to be charged in the year of disposal.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the profit or loss on disposal of the office equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
On 1 January 2018 Sam purchased new office equipment costing $8000 on credit from C Limited.
(b) Prepare a journal entry to record this purchase.
A narrative is required.
Sam
General Journal
Date
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
2018
[3]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
13
The new office equipment was expected to be used for 5 years and have a residual value of
$2000.
Sam was undecided about which method of depreciation to use for the new office equipment.
REQUIRED
(c) (i)
Calculate the annual depreciation on the new office equipment using the straight-line
(equal instalment) method.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the depreciation for the first year on the new office equipment using the
reducing (diminishing) balance method at 20% per annum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Sam decided to use the reducing (diminishing) balance method of depreciation.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare a journal entry to record the transfer to the income statement of the depreciation on
office equipment for the year ended 31 December 2018.
A narrative is required.
Sam
General Journal
Date
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
............
.......................................................
......................
......................
2018
[3]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
14
Sam’s book-keeper started to maintain a petty cash book on 1 April 2019. On that date $150 was
placed in the petty cash box. This was to be the monthly imprest which was to be restored on the
first day of each month.
At the end of April 2019 Sam discovered that only a few entries had been made in the petty cash
book for the month.
The following information about the petty cash transactions for April 2019 is available.
2019
April
$
11
Received refund from cleaner for overpayment in March
5
18
Paid Kelly, a credit supplier
35
21
Bought printer paper
23
30
Paid cleaner
56
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the entries for the transactions on 3 April and 6 April in the petty cash book on the
page opposite.
Enter the transactions for 11 April to 30 April in the petty cash book.
Balance the petty cash book on 30 April and bring down the balance on 1 May 2019.
Show the restoration of the imprest on 1 May 2019.
[10]
[Total: 24]
The petty cash book is printed on the next page
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
© UCLES 2019
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
6
..................
..................
3
April 1
2019
Date
..................
150
Total
received
$
0452/13/M/J/19
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
Parcel post
Taxi fare
Cash
Details
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
3
12
..................
Total
paid
$
Sam – Petty Cash Book
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Office
expenses
$
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
$
$
..................
Cleaning
Travel
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Ledger
accounts
$
15
[Turn over
16
5
Mostafa and Salma are partners in a wholesale business. Their financial year ends on 30 April.
When they started the business they drew up a partnership agreement. The terms of the agreement
included the following.
interest to be allowed on capital at 5% per annum
interest to be charged on drawings at 6%
Mostafa to be entitled to an annual salary of $12 000
residual profits and losses to be shared in the ratio of 3 : 2.
The partners provided the following information.
At 1 May 2018
Capital account
Current account
Mostafa
$
45 000
3 250 credit
Salma
$
25 000
1 920 debit
On 1 February 2019 the partners agreed that Mostafa’s salary should be increased to $15 000 per
annum.
For the year ended 30 April 2019
Drawings
Mostafa
$
10 000
Salma
$
8 000
The profit for the year ended 30 April 2019 was $14 820.
REQUIRED
(a) Suggest one reason why interest on capital was included in the partnership agreement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest one reason why interest on drawings was included in the partnership agreement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Suggest one reason why a salary for Mostafa was included in the partnership agreement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
17
(d) Prepare the profit and loss appropriation account for the year ended 30 April 2019.
Mostafa and Salma
Profit and Loss Appropriation Account for the year ended 30 April 2019
$
$
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
[8]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
18
(e) Complete the current account of Mostafa for the year ended 30 April 2019. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 May 2019.
Mostafa and Salma
Mostafa Current account
Date
Details
$
.............
....................................
..............
Date
2018
May 1
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
.............
....................................
..............
Details
Balance b/d
$
3 250
[5]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
19
6
S Limited was formed on 1 May 2018. On that date the company issued ordinary shares and 5%
debentures.
At the end of the financial year on 30 April 2019 the following financial statements were prepared:
Income statement
Statement of changes in equity
Statement of financial position
REQUIRED
(a) Name the financial statement in which each of the following items would appear.
Some items may appear in more than one statement.
If the item does not appear in any of the financial statements write ‘No entry’.
The first one has been completed as an example.
financial statement
Wages accrued at 30 April 2019
Income statement
Statement of financial position
Ordinary share capital
Creation of general reserve
Payment of interim ordinary share dividend
on 31 October 2018
Proposed ordinary share dividend at
30 April 2019
Debenture interest accrued on 30 April 2019
[8]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
20
The directors of S Limited wish to raise funds for expansion. They are undecided whether to issue
additional ordinary shares or additional 5% debentures.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate whether each
statement is true or false.
The first one has been completed as an example.
true
false
debenture holders receive interest
debenture holders receive a variable rate of interest
debentures are usually included in the non-current
liabilities section of the statement of financial position
debentures have a prior claim in the event of the
company being wound up
debenture holders are entitled to vote at the annual
general meeting
debentures are often secured on the non-current
assets of the company
[5]
(c) Suggest two ways in which the ordinary shareholders may be affected if the directors decide
to raise funds from an issue of debentures.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
The directors of S Limited are concerned about the working capital of the company at the end of
the first year of trading.
The following information is available at 30 April 2019.
Inventory
Trade payables
Trade receivables
Bank overdraft
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
$
27 400
28 700
25 200
10 800
21
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate the current ratio.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Calculate the quick ratio.
The calculation should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Explain why the quick ratio is more reliable than the current ratio as an indicator of liquidity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(g) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to show how each of the
following would affect the working capital of S Limited.
increase
decrease
no effect
issue additional debentures
pay operating expenses by cheque
sell goods for cash instead of on credit
delay paying credit suppliers
sell unused non-current assets
reduce credit period for credit customers
[6]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
[Turn over
22
(h) Suggest two problems the directors of S Limited may encounter if the working capital is
inadequate.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 29]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/M/J/19
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 9 3 8 0 7 3 6 1 9 7 *
0452/11
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
October/November 2019
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 23 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (CJ) 188378
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Insurance paid by a business included $400 relating to the owner’s private house.
This amount was not included in the income statement.
Which accounting principle was applied?
A
accruals (matching)
B
business entity
C
duality
D
prudence
[1]
(b) The following account appeared in Jacob’s ledger.
Cindy account
Date
2019
Aug 16
29
31
Details
Returns
Bank
Discount
Balance
c/d
$
110
441
9
280
840
Date
2019
Aug 1
14
Details
Balance
b/d
Purchases
$
450
390
840
Which statement is correct?
A
Cindy paid Jacob $441 by cheque on 29 August.
B
Cindy purchased goods, $390, on credit from Jacob on 14 August.
C
Jacob allowed Cindy $9 cash discount on 29 August.
D
Jacob owed Cindy $450 on 1 August.
[1]
(c) What is not a requirement of the accounting objective of reliability?
A
information must be available in time for decisions to be made
B
information must be free from bias
C
information must be free from errors
D
information must be prepared with suitable caution applied
to any judgement
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[1]
3
(d) On 2 September Tumelo purchased goods on credit, list price $4200, less trade discount of
20% and a cash discount of 2% if the invoice was paid within 30 days.
On 5 September Tumelo returned one-third of the goods to the supplier.
Which amount did Tumelo enter in his purchases returns journal?
A
$1092
B
$1120
C
$1372
D
$1400
[1]
(e) Which statements about debentures are correct?
(f)
1
Debentures carry a fixed rate of interest.
2
Debentures do not carry voting rights.
3
Debenture holders are members of the company.
4
Debenture interest depends on the profit of the company.
A
1 and 2
B
1 and 4
C
2 and 3
D
3 and 4
[1]
The totals of a trial balance did not agree.
Which error caused this?
A
A cheque paid to Hong for $500 had been credited to the account
of Heng.
B
An invoice for goods purchased, $50, was entered in the purchases
journal as $500.
C
Goods sold on credit to Gemma, $500, were debited to the account
of Gina.
D
Rent paid by cheque, $500, was debited to the rent receivable
account.
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[1]
[Turn over
4
(g) Sally provided the following information at the end of her financial year.
$
Revenue
44 000
Opening inventory
3 000
Closing inventory
1 000
Purchases
32 000
Expenses
6 000
What was Sally’s percentage of gross profit to revenue (gross profit margin)?
A
9.09%
B
11.76%
C
22.73%
D
29.41%
[1]
(h) A food retailer purchased a computer and debited the cost to the purchases account.
What was the effect on the profit for the year and the non-current assets?
non-current assets
overstated
understated
overstated
understated
A
B
C
D
(i)
[1]
Hassan’s trial balance did not balance and a suspense account was opened.
It was found that the total of the discount received column in the cash book, $173, had been
debited to the discount allowed account in the ledger.
Which journal entry corrects this error?
details
A
B
C
D
© UCLES 2019
debit
$
discount allowed
discount received
suspense
discount received
suspense
suspense
discount allowed
suspense
discount allowed
discount received
credit
$
173
173
346
173
173
173
173
346
173
173
0452/11/O/N/19
[1]
5
(j)
Beketele’s financial year ends on 31 December. On 1 January 2015 she purchased a machine
costing $18 000. The machine was depreciated by 15% per annum using the straight line
(equal instalment) method. The machine was sold on 1 January 2019.
What was the book value of the machine on the date of sale?
A
$4500
B
$7200
C
$10 800
D
$13 500
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
6
2
Aisha is a retailer. She buys goods on credit from Kadir, a wholesaler. They exchanged several
documents during September 2019.
The following incomplete document was issued on 18 September 2019.
Credit Note
Kadir
123 West View
Some City
Aisha
14 Straight Row
Anywhere
Quantity
70
18 September 2019
Description
Unit price
$
Suits assorted sizes
Amount
$
4130
(i) ..........
Less 20% Trade discount
(ii) ..........
(iii) ..........
Reason for issue: Correcting overcharge
on goods supplied on 4 September 2019
REQUIRED
(a) Insert the missing figures in (i) – (iii) in the above document.
[3]
(b) Name the person who issued the above document.
.......................................................
[1]
(c) Suggest one reason why a credit note may be issued other than correcting an overcharge.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State why it was necessary to deduct trade discount on the credit note.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Name the book of prime (original) entry in which each trader would record the credit note.
book of prime (original) entry
used by Aisha
book of prime (original) entry
used by Kadir
.................................................
.................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
7
On 1 September 2019 Aisha owed Kadir $3400.
During September 2019 Aisha and Kadir exchanged the following documents (in addition to the
credit note).
September 4 Invoice for goods, $8960
13 Debit note, $3540, claiming overcharge for goods supplied on 4 September
27 Cheque to settle balance outstanding on 1 September less 2% cash discount
30 Statement of account showing a closing balance of $5656
REQUIRED
(f)
Name the book of prime (original) entry in which Aisha would record these documents.
If the document is not recorded in a book of prime (original) entry, write ‘no entry’.
document
book of prime (original) entry used by
Aisha
invoice
………………………………………………..
debit note
……………………………………………….
cheque
…………………………………………………
statement of account
……………………………………………….
[4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
8
(g) Prepare the account of Kadir as it would appear in the ledger of Aisha for the month of
September 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 October 2019.
Aisha
Kadir account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
2019
2019
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
[7]
(h) State the name of the ledger in which Aisha would maintain Kadir’s account.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
9
3
Timothy is a trader who buys and sells on both cash and credit terms. He maintains a full set of
accounting records and prepares monthly control accounts.
REQUIRED
(a) State two advantages to Timothy of preparing monthly control accounts.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Name the book of prime (original) entry which Timothy would use to obtain the following
information when preparing his purchases ledger control account.
book of prime (original) entry
purchases returns
contra entry
discount received
interest charged on overdue account
[4]
(c) State the meaning of a contra entry in connection with control accounts.
State why Timothy made a contra entry.
Meaning ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State two reasons why it is possible for Timothy to have a debit balance on his purchases
ledger control account.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
10
Timothy provided the following information for October 2019.
$
On 1 October
Debit balance on sales ledger control account
Credit balance on sales ledger control account
6530
110
Totals for the month of October
Credit sales
Cash sales
Receipts from credit customers
Discount allowed to credit customers
Discount received from credit suppliers
Returns by credit customers
Bad debts written off
Increase in provision for doubtful debts
Contra entry
Interest charged on a credit customer’s overdue account
7860
3850
5782
118
246
285
260
170
300
15
On 1 November
Debit balance on sales ledger control account
Credit balance on sales ledger control account
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
?
80
11
REQUIRED
(e) Select the relevant figures and prepare the sales ledger control account for the month of
October 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 November 2019.
Timothy
Sales ledger control account
Date
Details
2019
Oct 1 Balance b/d
$
6530
Date
2019
Oct 1
Balance b/d
Details
$
110
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. ……......
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. ……......
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
............ .............................. ……......
[9]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
12
Question 4 is on the next page.
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
13
4
Abiola started a business on 1 September 2017. On that date she opened a business bank account
with a capital of $40 000 and a loan of $10 000. On the same day she purchased inventory, $6600,
and fixtures and fittings, $11 750, paying by bank transfer.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare a journal entry, to include all the above information, to open the books of the business
on 1 September 2017.
A narrative is required.
Abiola
General Journal
Date
2017
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
Sept 1
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
[5]
(b) State why it is useful to show a narrative as part of a journal entry.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
14
The following transactions took place on 1 March 2018.
1
Abiola transferred her private motor vehicle to the business at a valuation of $12 000.
2
Abiola took goods, $450, from the business for personal use.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions of 1 March 2018.
Narratives are not required.
Abiola
General Journal
1
2
Date
2018
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
Mar 1
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
Mar 1
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
………………………………………….
....................
....................
[4]
Abiola rents premises at an annual rent of $6000, payable on the first of each month.
She provided the following information.
$
2018
September 1
Rent payable accrued
500
The following amounts of rent were paid by bank transfer.
© UCLES 2019
2018
September 2
3000
2019
February
August
3000
1500
3
6
0452/11/O/N/19
15
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the rent payable account in the ledger of Abiola for the year ended 31 August 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 September 2019.
Abiola
Rent payable account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
[5]
(e) Explain how the accounting principle of accruals (matching) was applied in the preparation of
the rent payable account.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
16
Abiola receives commission from another trader when Abiola’s customers purchase goods from
his shop.
Abiola provided the following information.
$
2018
September 1
Commission receivable outstanding
350
The following amounts of commission were received by bank transfer.
2018
September 30
350
2019
January
April
July
425
395
470
31
30
31
On 31 August 2019 commission receivable outstanding amounted to $310.
REQUIRED
(f)
Prepare the commission receivable account in the ledger of Abiola for the year ended
31 August 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 September 2019.
Abiola
Commission receivable account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
[5]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
17
5
The KW Sports Club has 50 members. The annual subscription is $85. The financial year ends on
30 September. The treasurer prepares a full set of financial statements at the end of each financial
year.
On 1 October 2018 subscriptions had been prepaid by 14 members.
On 30 September 2019 subscriptions had been prepaid by 10 members and 22 members had not
paid their subscription for the year.
REQUIRED
(a) State the meaning of the word ‘subscriptions’ in connection with clubs and societies.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the subscriptions received during the year ended 30 September 2019.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) Discuss the possible effects on the bank account and the income and expenditure account of
KW Sports Club if the annual subscription was increased to $105.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
18
(d) State four ways in which an income and expenditure account differs from a receipts and
payments account.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
4 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
The income and expenditure account for the year ended 30 September 2019 showed a deficit.
After the preparation of the account it was found that several errors had been made.
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate the effect of each
error on the deficit for the year.
If the error does not affect the deficit place a tick ( ) in the column headed ‘no effect’.
error
overstated
understated
no effect
the total of the income from a sports
competition was understated
no entry had been made for bank
charges
proceeds of sale of club equipment were
included in the income
no adjustment was made of club shop
wages accrued at the year-end
shop rent was charged to the income
and expenditure account instead of the
shop income statement
[5]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
19
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
20
6
Amrit runs a secretarial agency. His financial year ends on 31 July. He prepared the following trial
balance on 31 July 2019.
$
Fees from clients
Premises (at cost)
Office equipment (at cost)
Provision for depreciation of office equipment
Capital
Drawings
5% Loan (repayable 1 February 2020)
Trade receivables
Provision for doubtful debts
Bad debts
Insurance
Wages
Operating expenses
Rent receivable
Bank
$
58 800
90 000
16 000
3 200
85 000
11 500
15 000
4 650
100
80
2 100
38 000
6 500
168 830
3 000
3 730
168 830
The following information is available.
1
The insurance covers a period of 14 months to 30 September 2019.
2
At 31 July 2019 wages, $1500, were accrued and one year’s loan interest was outstanding.
3
A debt of $150 should be written off as irrecoverable.
4
The provision for doubtful debts should be maintained at 3% of the remaining trade
receivables.
5
The office equipment is to be depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing (diminishing)
balance method.
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
21
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2019.
Amrit
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2019
$
$
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
[14]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
[Turn over
22
Amrit is considering several proposals to try to increase his working capital.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate how each proposal
would affect Amrit’s working capital.
increase
decrease
no effect
extend the loan for a further 2 years
ask the bank to extend the overdraft facility
[3]
(c) Suggest two possible reasons why Amrit’s return on capital employed (ROCE) was higher on
31 July 2019 than it was on 31 July 2018.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
On 1 August 2019 Amrit decided to admit his sister, Neena, to the business as a partner.
The partnership agreement provided for the following:
interest on capital of 4% per annum
interest on drawings of 3%
Amrit to be entitled to a partnership salary of $6000 per annum
profits and losses to be shared Amrit 60% and Neena 40%.
Amrit made an adjustment to his capital so that it equalled $80 000.
Neena invested $60 000.
It was estimated that the profit for the first year of trading would be $15 500.
It was estimated that the partners’ drawings during the first year of trading would be Amrit $7000
and Neena $5000.
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
23
REQUIRED
(d) State two advantages to Amrit of being a partner rather than a sole trader.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) State two disadvantages to Amrit of being a partner rather than a sole trader.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Complete the estimated profit and loss appropriation account for the year ending 31 July 2020.
Amrit and Neena
Estimated Profit and Loss Appropriation Account for the year ending 31 July 2020
$
Interest on drawings Amrit
$
15 500
....................... .......................
Neena
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
Interest on capital
Amrit
....................... .......................
Neena
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
Partnership salary
Amrit
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
Neena
....................... .......................
[6]
[Total: 29]
© UCLES 2019
0452/11/O/N/19
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 2 5 6 9 4 5 5 5 3 1 *
0452/12
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
October/November 2019
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages.
DC (SC) 169006/2
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Which group contains only assets?
A
accrued wages, inventory, trade payables
B
cash, machinery, rent receivable accrued
C
bank loan, drawings, office fixtures and fittings
D
bank overdraft, prepaid insurance, trade receivables
[1]
(b) On 1 January 2018 Jennie, a food retailer, had stationery valued at $45.
During the year she purchased stationery, $200.
On 31 December 2018 she transferred $194 from the stationery account to the income
statement.
What was the balance of the stationery account on 1 January 2019?
A
$39 credit
B
$39 debit
C
$51 credit
D
$51 debit
[1]
(c) Which items may appear on the debit side of a purchases ledger control account?
1
2
3
4
contra entry
discount received
interest on overdue account
purchases
A
1 and 2 only
B
1, 2 and 3
C
3 and 4
D
4 only
[1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
3
(d) A trader always depreciates his motor vehicles using the reducing (diminishing) balance
method.
Which accounting principle is he applying?
A
consistency
B
duality
C
going concern
D
realisation
[1]
(e) Which ratio can only be calculated using information from both the income statement and the
statement of financial position?
A
margin
B
mark-up
C
rate of inventory turnover
D
return on capital employed
[1]
(f)
Asim and Bakari are in partnership. Their partnership agreement provides for an annual
salary of $15 000 for Bakari and the balance of the profit to be shared equally.
The profit for the year was $93 000.
What was Bakari’s total income from the business?
A
$39 000
B
$46 500
C
$54 000
D
$61 500
[1]
(g) Which error does not affect the balancing of a trial balance?
A
Cash received from Smith was debited to Smythe’s account.
B
Motor vehicle expenses were debited to the motor vehicles account.
C
One page of the sales journal was overcast.
D
Purchases returns were omitted from the purchases ledger.
[1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
4
(h) A manufacturer provided the following information at the end of his financial year.
direct materials
direct labour
factory overheads
increase in work in progress
$
314 000
181 000
117 000
32 000
What was the cost of production?
A
$346 000
B
$410 000
C
$580 000
D
$644 000
[1]
(i)
Jamal did not maintain double entry records during his first year of trading.
Which item is not required in order to calculate his credit sales using a total trade receivables
account?
A
bad debts
B
discount allowed
C
provision for doubtful debts
D
receipts from credit customers
[1]
(j)
During her first year of trading Daraja purchased 1000 units of inventory at $16 each.
She sold 910 units at $19 each. Of the inventory remaining at the end of her financial year
30 units were damaged and valued at $7 each.
What was the value of Daraja’s inventory at the end of the financial year?
A
$1170
B
$1350
C
$1440
D
$1710
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
5
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
6
2
Saleh started to maintain a petty cash book on 1 August 2019. He decided to use the imprest
system, with the monthly imprest of $150 which would be restored on the first day of each month.
Saleh’s transactions for the month of August 2019 included the following.
August 4
9
14
20
26
30
Purchased stationery
Paid Omar, a credit supplier
Bought flowers for office
Paid taxi fare
Bought tea and coffee for office
Paid cleaner
$
21
57
10
9
7
30
REQUIRED
(a) Enter the transactions in Saleh’s petty cash book on the page opposite.
Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 September 2019.
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[10]
© UCLES 2019
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
1
....................
Aug
2019
Date
....................
150
Total
received
$
0452/12/O/N/19
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
....................................................
Bank
Details
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
Total
paid
$
Office
expenses
$
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
Saleh – Petty Cash Book
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
$
Travel
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
$
Cleaning
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
....................
Ledger
accounts
$
7
[Turn over
8
(b) (i)
State the amount which was received on 1 September 2019 when the petty cash was
restored to the imprest amount.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the double entry for restoring the imprest amount.
debit
credit
[2]
(c) Show the entries which were made in the following accounts on 31 August 2019.
It is not necessary to total or balance the accounts.
Saleh
Office expenses account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
Omar account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
[2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
9
Saleh balanced his cash book on 31 August 2019 and compared the balance on the bank column
with his bank statement. The following differences were found.
$
Items not recorded in the cash book
Bank charges
Credit transfer from Laila
Insurance premium paid by standing order
22
190
30
Items not recorded on the bank statement
Cheque paid to Kalifa
Cheque paid to Fatima
Cash sales
114
175
363
REQUIRED
(d) Update the bank columns of the cash book.
Bring down the new balance on 1 September 2019.
Saleh
Cash Book (bank columns only)
Date
2019
Details
$
Date
2019
.............
............................
.............
Sept 1
Balance
b/d
944
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
Details
$
[4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
10
(e) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 August 2019 to show the balance on the bank
statement on that date.
Saleh
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 August 2019
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 25]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
11
3
Tumelo is a trader. He buys goods on credit from Azuel.
The traders exchanged various documents in July 2019.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table by naming the person who issued each document.
Name the book of prime (original) entry in which each document would be recorded by each
trader.
If a document is not entered in a book of prime (original) entry, write ‘No entry’.
document
name of
person issuing
document
book of prime (original)
entry used by Tumelo
book of prime (original)
entry used by Azuel
invoice
debit note
credit note
[9]
The following incomplete document was prepared on 31 July 2019.
Azuel
West Street
Somecity
Tumelo
North Avenue
Anytown
Date
31 July 2019
Reference
2019
July 1
14
18
27
Debit
$
Balance due
Goods
Returns
Payment
Discount
Credit
$
Balance
$
190
294
6
300
?
?
?
?
470
REQUIRED
(b) (i)
State the name of the document.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Name the person who issued the document.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
12
(iii)
State one reason for the issue of the document.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
Name the person who owed the opening balance of $300.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v)
Calculate the percentage of the discount on 27 July 2019.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi)
Calculate the balance due on 31 July 2019.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vii)
State why this document was not used as a source document by either Tumelo or Azuel.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Azuel divides his ledger into three – the sales ledger, the purchases ledger and the nominal
(general) ledger.
(c) State two advantages of dividing the ledger into these three sections.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Complete the table by naming the ledger in which Azuel would maintain each of the following
accounts.
account
ledger
Tumelo, a credit customer
sales returns
Lerato, a credit supplier
purchases
carriage inwards
[5]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
13
4
Gary is a manufacturer of kitchen equipment. His financial year ends on 30 September.
On 1 August 2019 Ed, a credit customer, was declared bankrupt and the balance of his account of
$326 was written off as irrecoverable.
No other debts were written off during the year.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare a journal entry to write off the amount owed by Ed.
A narrative is required.
Gary
General Journal
Date
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
..............
.......................................................
......................
......................
..............
.......................................................
......................
......................
..............
.......................................................
......................
......................
..............
.......................................................
......................
......................
2019
[3]
On 1 June 2018 the account of Sally, a credit customer who owed $440, was written off as
irrecoverable.
On 4 September 2019 Sally settled her account with $180 in cash and a computer valued at $260.
REQUIRED
(b) State how Gary would record the transaction on 4 September 2019.
account debited
account credited
$
$
.....................................
........
.....................................
........
.....................................
........
.....................................
........
[3]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
14
Gary maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 2½% of the trade receivables at the end of each
financial year. He provided the following information.
Trade receivables at 30 September 2018 owed $36 400
Trade receivables at 30 September 2019 owed $38 000
(c) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 30 September 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 October 2019.
Gary
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
.............
............................
.............
[5]
Gary wishes to increase his profit for the year. He has decided to stop maintaining a provision for
doubtful debts.
REQUIRED
(d) Explain why Gary should continue to maintain a provision for doubtful debts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
15
(e) Complete the table to indicate the effect of omitting to record the bad debt, the bad debt
recovered and the adjustment to the provision for doubtful debts.
The first one has been completed as an example.
item omitted
effect on profit for the
year ended
30 September 2019
effect on current
assets at
30 September 2019
$
bad debts
overstated
326
$
overstated
326
bad debt recovered
adjustment to provision for doubtful
debts
[4]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
16
5
Oliver and Amy are in partnership. They are considering converting the business to a limited
liability company.
REQUIRED
(a) Explain the term ‘limited liability company’.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State two benefits (excluding limited liability) to Oliver and Amy of forming a limited liability
company.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State the meaning of the following terms.
(i)
called-up share capital
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
paid-up share capital
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
If Oliver and Amy decide to form a limited liability company they plan to raise funds from an issue
of ordinary shares and an issue of debentures.
(d) State two features of ordinary shares.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
17
(e) State two features of debentures.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Oliver and Amy understand that a statement of changes in equity has to be prepared in addition to
an annual income statement.
(f)
Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate whether each item
appears in a limited company’s income statement or statement of changes in equity.
If the item does not appear in these financial statements place a tick ( ) in the ‘no entry’
column.
income
statement
statement
of changes
in equity
no entry
issue of 5% debentures during the year
debenture interest relating to the
current year paid during the year
final ordinary share dividend relating to
the previous financial year paid during
the current year
interim ordinary share dividend paid for
the current year
proposed ordinary share dividend
for the current year
[5]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
18
6
Pavita is a food wholesaler. Her financial year ends on 30 September. She provided the following
information on 30 September 2019 after the calculation of her gross profit.
Gross profit
Non-current assets at cost
Premises
Fixtures and fittings
Motor vehicle
Provisions for depreciation of non-current assets
Fixtures and fittings
Motor vehicle
Wages
Rates and insurance
Trade receivables
Trade payables
Drawings
Capital at 1 October 2018
Operating expenses
Motor expenses
Discount received
Inventory at 30 September 2019
Bank
$
40 780
96 000
12 000
14 400
4 800
6 300
27 120
1 700
8 940
10 280
2 980
112 000
3 195
1 155
970
8 870
1 230 credit
Additional information
1
At 30 September 2019 wages accrued amounted to $980.
2
The rates and insurance includes $900 for insurance for 15 months to 31 December 2019.
3
Pavita’s cash drawings, $1000, have been debited to the wages account in error.
4
$190 owing by a credit customer should be written off as irrecoverable.
5
The fixtures and fittings are to be depreciated using the straight line (equal instalment) method
at 20% per annum.
6
The motor vehicle is to be depreciated using the reducing (diminishing) balance method at
25% per annum.
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
19
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2019.
Pavita
Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2019
$
$
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
...............................................................................
........................
........................
[12]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
[Turn over
20
(b) Calculate Pavita’s working capital at 30 September 2019.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Suggest two ways in which Pavita could increase her working capital.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Calculate the current ratio correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Pavita provided the following additional information for the year ended 30 September 2019.
$
120 000
88 100
Credit sales
Credit purchases
She allows her credit customers 21 days credit and is allowed 30 days credit by her credit
suppliers.
REQUIRED
(e) State the formula for the calculation of the trade receivables collection period.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
21
(f)
Calculate the trade receivables collection period for the year ended 30 September 2019.
Round up your answer to the next whole day.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(g) Suggest one way in which Pavita could improve the trade receivables collection period.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(h) State the formula for the calculation of the trade payables payment period.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(i)
Calculate the trade payables payment period for the year ended 30 September 2019.
Round up your answer to the next whole day.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(j)
State whether the trade payables would be satisfied with the payment period.
Give a reason for your answer.
Satisfied? ......................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 28]
© UCLES 2019
0452/12/O/N/19
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 7 3 7 9 5 0 3 4 4 5 *
0452/13
ACCOUNTING
Paper 1
October/November 2019
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may use a calculator.
Where layouts are to be completed, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
The businesses mentioned in this Question Paper are fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 23 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (LK) 169008/3
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
2
There are 10 parts to Question 1.
For each of the parts (a) to (j) below there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and place a tick ( ) in the box to indicate the correct answer.
1
(a) Insurance paid by a business included $400 relating to the owner’s private house.
This amount was not included in the income statement.
Which accounting principle was applied?
A
accruals (matching)
B
business entity
C
duality
D
prudence
[1]
(b) The following account appeared in Jacob’s ledger.
Cindy account
Date
2019
Aug 16
29
31
Details
Returns
Bank
Discount
Balance
c/d
$
110
441
9
280
840
Date
2019
Aug 1
14
Details
Balance
b/d
Purchases
$
450
390
840
Which statement is correct?
A
Cindy paid Jacob $441 by cheque on 29 August.
B
Cindy purchased goods, $390, on credit from Jacob on 14 August.
C
Jacob allowed Cindy $9 cash discount on 29 August.
D
Jacob owed Cindy $450 on 1 August.
[1]
(c) What is not a requirement of the accounting objective of reliability?
A
information must be available in time for decisions to be made
B
information must be free from bias
C
information must be free from errors
D
information must be prepared with suitable caution applied
to any judgement
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[1]
3
(d) On 2 September Tumelo purchased goods on credit, list price $4200, less trade discount of
20% and a cash discount of 2% if the invoice was paid within 30 days.
On 5 September Tumelo returned one-third of the goods to the supplier.
Which amount did Tumelo enter in his purchases returns journal?
A
$1092
B
$1120
C
$1372
D
$1400
[1]
(e) Which statements about debentures are correct?
(f)
1
Debentures carry a fixed rate of interest.
2
Debentures do not carry voting rights.
3
Debenture holders are members of the company.
4
Debenture interest depends on the profit of the company.
A
1 and 2
B
1 and 4
C
2 and 3
D
3 and 4
[1]
The totals of a trial balance did not agree.
Which error caused this?
A
A cheque paid to Hong for $500 had been credited to the account
of Heng.
B
An invoice for goods purchased, $50, was entered in the purchases
journal as $500.
C
Goods sold on credit to Gemma, $500, were debited to the account
of Gina.
D
Rent paid by cheque, $500, was debited to the rent receivable
account.
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[1]
[Turn over
4
(g) Sally provided the following information at the end of her financial year.
$
Revenue
44 000
Opening inventory
3 000
Closing inventory
1 000
Purchases
32 000
Expenses
6 000
What was Sally’s percentage of gross profit to revenue (gross profit margin)?
A
9.09%
B
11.76%
C
22.73%
D
29.41%
[1]
(h) A food retailer purchased a computer and debited the cost to the purchases account.
What was the effect on the profit for the year and the non-current assets?
non-current assets
overstated
understated
overstated
understated
A
B
C
D
(i)
[1]
Hassan’s trial balance did not balance and a suspense account was opened.
It was found that the total of the discount received column in the cash book, $173, had been
debited to the discount allowed account in the ledger.
Which journal entry corrects this error?
details
A
B
C
D
© UCLES 2019
debit
$
discount allowed
discount received
suspense
discount received
suspense
suspense
discount allowed
suspense
discount allowed
discount received
credit
$
173
173
346
173
173
173
173
346
173
173
0452/13/O/N/19
[1]
5
(j)
Beketele’s financial year ends on 31 December. On 1 January 2015 she purchased a machine
costing $18 000. The machine was depreciated by 15% per annum using the straight line
(equal instalment) method. The machine was sold on 1 January 2019.
What was the book value of the machine on the date of sale?
A
$4500
B
$7200
C
$10 800
D
$13 500
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
6
2
Aisha is a retailer. She buys goods on credit from Kadir, a wholesaler. They exchanged several
documents during September 2019.
The following incomplete document was issued on 18 September 2019.
Credit Note
Kadir
123 West View
Some City
Aisha
14 Straight Row
Anywhere
Quantity
70
18 September 2019
Description
Unit price
$
Suits assorted sizes
Amount
$
4130
(i) ..........
Less 20% Trade discount
(ii) ..........
(iii) ..........
Reason for issue: Correcting overcharge
on goods supplied on 4 September 2019
REQUIRED
(a) Insert the missing figures in (i) – (iii) in the above document.
[3]
(b) Name the person who issued the above document.
.......................................................
[1]
(c) Suggest one reason why a credit note may be issued other than correcting an overcharge.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State why it was necessary to deduct trade discount on the credit note.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Name the book of prime (original) entry in which each trader would record the credit note.
book of prime (original) entry
used by Aisha
book of prime (original) entry
used by Kadir
.................................................
.................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
7
On 1 September 2019 Aisha owed Kadir $3400.
During September 2019 Aisha and Kadir exchanged the following documents (in addition to the
credit note).
September 4 Invoice for goods, $8960
13 Debit note, $3540, claiming overcharge for goods supplied on 4 September
27 Cheque to settle balance outstanding on 1 September less 2% cash discount
30 Statement of account showing a closing balance of $5656
REQUIRED
(f)
Name the book of prime (original) entry in which Aisha would record these documents.
If the document is not recorded in a book of prime (original) entry, write ‘no entry’.
document
book of prime (original) entry used by
Aisha
invoice
………………………………………………..
debit note
……………………………………………….
cheque
…………………………………………………
statement of account
……………………………………………….
[4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
8
(g) Prepare the account of Kadir as it would appear in the ledger of Aisha for the month of
September 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 October 2019.
Aisha
Kadir account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
2019
2019
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
[7]
(h) State the name of the ledger in which Aisha would maintain Kadir’s account.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
9
3
Timothy is a trader who buys and sells on both cash and credit terms. He maintains a full set of
accounting records and prepares monthly control accounts.
REQUIRED
(a) State two advantages to Timothy of preparing monthly control accounts.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Name the book of prime (original) entry which Timothy would use to obtain the following
information when preparing his purchases ledger control account.
book of prime (original) entry
purchases returns
contra entry
discount received
interest charged on overdue account
[4]
(c) State the meaning of a contra entry in connection with control accounts.
State why Timothy made a contra entry.
Meaning ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State two reasons why it is possible for Timothy to have a debit balance on his purchases
ledger control account.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
10
Timothy provided the following information for October 2019.
$
On 1 October
Debit balance on sales ledger control account
Credit balance on sales ledger control account
6530
110
Totals for the month of October
Credit sales
Cash sales
Receipts from credit customers
Discount allowed to credit customers
Discount received from credit suppliers
Returns by credit customers
Bad debts written off
Increase in provision for doubtful debts
Contra entry
Interest charged on a credit customer’s overdue account
7860
3850
5782
118
246
285
260
170
300
15
On 1 November
Debit balance on sales ledger control account
Credit balance on sales ledger control account
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
?
80
11
REQUIRED
(e) Select the relevant figures and prepare the sales ledger control account for the month of
October 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 November 2019.
Timothy
Sales ledger control account
Date
Details
2019
Oct 1 Balance b/d
$
6530
Date
2019
Oct 1
Balance b/d
Details
$
110
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. ……......
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. ……......
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
...........
.............................. …..........
...........
..............................
...........
............ .............................. ……......
[9]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
12
Question 4 is on the next page.
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
13
4
Abiola started a business on 1 September 2017. On that date she opened a business bank account
with a capital of $40 000 and a loan of $10 000. On the same day she purchased inventory, $6600,
and fixtures and fittings, $11 750, paying by bank transfer.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare a journal entry, to include all the above information, to open the books of the business
on 1 September 2017.
A narrative is required.
Abiola
General Journal
Date
2017
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
Sept 1
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
..............
............................................................ .....................
.....................
[5]
(b) State why it is useful to show a narrative as part of a journal entry.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
14
The following transactions took place on 1 March 2018.
1
Abiola transferred her private motor vehicle to the business at a valuation of $12 000.
2
Abiola took goods, $450, from the business for personal use.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions of 1 March 2018.
Narratives are not required.
Abiola
General Journal
1
2
Date
2018
Details
Debit
$
Credit
$
Mar 1
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
Mar 1
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
…………………………………………..
....................
....................
..............
………………………………………….
....................
....................
[4]
Abiola rents premises at an annual rent of $6000, payable on the first of each month.
She provided the following information.
$
2018
September 1
Rent payable accrued
500
The following amounts of rent were paid by bank transfer.
© UCLES 2019
2018
September 2
3000
2019
February
August
3000
1500
3
6
0452/13/O/N/19
15
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the rent payable account in the ledger of Abiola for the year ended 31 August 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 September 2019.
Abiola
Rent payable account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
[5]
(e) Explain how the accounting principle of accruals (matching) was applied in the preparation of
the rent payable account.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
16
Abiola receives commission from another trader when Abiola’s customers purchase goods from
his shop.
Abiola provided the following information.
$
2018
September 1
Commission receivable outstanding
350
The following amounts of commission were received by bank transfer.
2018
September 30
350
2019
January
April
July
425
395
470
31
30
31
On 31 August 2019 commission receivable outstanding amounted to $310.
REQUIRED
(f)
Prepare the commission receivable account in the ledger of Abiola for the year ended
31 August 2019.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 September 2019.
Abiola
Commission receivable account
Date
Details
$
Date
Details
$
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............
[5]
[Total: 23]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
17
5
The KW Sports Club has 50 members. The annual subscription is $85. The financial year ends on
30 September. The treasurer prepares a full set of financial statements at the end of each financial
year.
On 1 October 2018 subscriptions had been prepaid by 14 members.
On 30 September 2019 subscriptions had been prepaid by 10 members and 22 members had not
paid their subscription for the year.
REQUIRED
(a) State the meaning of the word ‘subscriptions’ in connection with clubs and societies.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the subscriptions received during the year ended 30 September 2019.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) Discuss the possible effects on the bank account and the income and expenditure account of
KW Sports Club if the annual subscription was increased to $105.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
18
(d) State four ways in which an income and expenditure account differs from a receipts and
payments account.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
4 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
The income and expenditure account for the year ended 30 September 2019 showed a deficit.
After the preparation of the account it was found that several errors had been made.
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate the effect of each
error on the deficit for the year.
If the error does not affect the deficit place a tick ( ) in the column headed ‘no effect’.
error
overstated
understated
no effect
the total of the income from a sports
competition was understated
no entry had been made for bank
charges
proceeds of sale of club equipment were
included in the income
no adjustment was made of club shop
wages accrued at the year-end
shop rent was charged to the income
and expenditure account instead of the
shop income statement
[5]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
19
PLEASE TURN OVER
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
20
6
Amrit runs a secretarial agency. His financial year ends on 31 July. He prepared the following trial
balance on 31 July 2019.
$
Fees from clients
Premises (at cost)
Office equipment (at cost)
Provision for depreciation of office equipment
Capital
Drawings
5% Loan (repayable 1 February 2020)
Trade receivables
Provision for doubtful debts
Bad debts
Insurance
Wages
Operating expenses
Rent receivable
Bank
$
58 800
90 000
16 000
3 200
85 000
11 500
15 000
4 650
100
80
2 100
38 000
6 500
168 830
3 000
3 730
168 830
The following information is available.
1
The insurance covers a period of 14 months to 30 September 2019.
2
At 31 July 2019 wages, $1500, were accrued and one year’s loan interest was outstanding.
3
A debt of $150 should be written off as irrecoverable.
4
The provision for doubtful debts should be maintained at 3% of the remaining trade
receivables.
5
The office equipment is to be depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing (diminishing)
balance method.
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
21
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2019.
Amrit
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2019
$
$
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
.................................................................................
.........................
.........................
[14]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
[Turn over
22
Amrit is considering several proposals to try to increase his working capital.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table by placing a tick ( ) in the correct column to indicate how each proposal
would affect Amrit’s working capital.
increase
decrease
no effect
extend the loan for a further 2 years
ask the bank to extend the overdraft facility
[3]
(c) Suggest two possible reasons why Amrit’s return on capital employed (ROCE) was higher on
31 July 2019 than it was on 31 July 2018.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
On 1 August 2019 Amrit decided to admit his sister, Neena, to the business as a partner.
The partnership agreement provided for the following:
interest on capital of 4% per annum
interest on drawings of 3%
Amrit to be entitled to a partnership salary of $6000 per annum
profits and losses to be shared Amrit 60% and Neena 40%.
Amrit made an adjustment to his capital so that it equalled $80 000.
Neena invested $60 000.
It was estimated that the profit for the first year of trading would be $15 500.
It was estimated that the partners’ drawings during the first year of trading would be Amrit $7000
and Neena $5000.
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
23
REQUIRED
(d) State two advantages to Amrit of being a partner rather than a sole trader.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) State two disadvantages to Amrit of being a partner rather than a sole trader.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
Complete the estimated profit and loss appropriation account for the year ending 31 July 2020.
Amrit and Neena
Estimated Profit and Loss Appropriation Account for the year ending 31 July 2020
$
Interest on drawings Amrit
$
15 500
....................... .......................
Neena
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
Interest on capital
Amrit
....................... .......................
Neena
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
Partnership salary
Amrit
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
....................... .......................
Neena
....................... .......................
[6]
[Total: 29]
© UCLES 2019
0452/13/O/N/19
Cambridge IGCSE™
ACCOUNTING
0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
February/March 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*4741387681*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 03_0452_12/2RP
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
2
Which task would be carried out by a book-keeper but not an accountant?
A
comparing one year’s results with those of previous years
B
interpreting the accounting records
C
preparing financial statements
D
recording transactions in the ledgers and cash book
A business provided the following information on 1 February 2019.
$
non-current assets
75 000
current assets
40 000
current liabilities
25 000
The business made a profit of $10 000 for the year ended 31 January 2020.
The owner did not make any drawings during the year.
What was the capital on 31 January 2020?
A
3
$35 000
B
$50 000
C
$70 000
D
$100 000
Dilip is a manufacturer. He purchased a machine on credit from Sachin.
How did Dilip record this?
account to
be debited
account to
be credited
A
machinery
Sachin
B
purchases
Sachin
C
Sachin
machinery
D
Sachin
purchases
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/F/M/20
3
4
Mui owns a household appliance store. He took home a washing machine for his personal use.
Mui recorded this transaction as follows.
account debited
account credited
drawings
sales
Did Mui make the correct entries to record this transaction?
5
debit entry
credit entry
A
no
no
B
no
yes
C
yes
no
D
yes
yes
The following account appeared in the books of Abdul.
Hanif account
2020
Jan 18
31
$
2020
returns
100
Jan 1
bank
392
4
discount
balance c / d
$
balance b / d
400
purchases
250
8
150
650
650
Which statement is correct?
6
A
On 1 January Abdul owed Hanif $400.
B
On 4 January Hanif purchased goods, $250, from Abdul.
C
On 31 January Abdul allowed Hanif $8 trade discount.
D
On 31 January Hanif owed Abdul $150.
Which business document contains details of purchases, returns and payments occurring during
a trading period?
A
credit note
B
debit note
C
invoice
D
statement of account
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/F/M/20
[Turn over
4
7
Rashida sells goods on credit and allows her customers a trade discount.
Which statements are correct?
A
8
1
A debit entry is made in the customer’s account in the sales ledger for the net value
of the goods sold.
2
The date of sale, name of the customer, cost price and trade discount are entered in
the sales journal.
3
The trade discount is debited to the customer’s account and credited to the discount
allowed account.
1 and 2
B
1 and 3
C
2 only
D
2 and 3
The totals of a trial balance agreed but it was found that the purchase of office equipment had
been debited to office expenses account.
Which type of error has been made?
9
A
commission
B
compensating
C
original entry
D
principle
On 31 January, Somraj’s bank statement showed a credit balance of $740. Comparing the bank
statement with the cash book he found the following.
$
bank charges not recorded in the cash book
cheque paid but not presented to the bank
30
150
Somraj updated his cash book as required.
What was the updated cash book balance on 31 January?
A
$590
B
$620
C
$860
D
$890
10 When Mark started a car repair business, he purchased premises and equipment.
Two years later he spent $5000 on building an extension, $600 on new equipment and $750 on
repainting the original premises.
By how much will the non-current assets increase because of these transactions?
A
$5000
© UCLES 2020
B
$5600
C
$5750
0452/12/F/M/20
D
$6350
5
11 A farmer sold a piece of land at market value.
How should the proceeds of this sale be treated?
A
as a capital receipt
B
as a revenue receipt
C
as capital expenditure
D
as revenue expenditure
12 Why should a trader provide for the depreciation of a non-current asset?
A
1
to match the cost against the revenue of the years which benefit from the use of the
asset
2
to provide a cash fund to enable the asset to be replaced at the end of its useful life
3
to recognise that most non-current assets lose value with the passage of time
4
to spread the cost of the asset over its expected working life to avoid overstating
profit
1 and 2 only
B
1, 3 and 4
C
2 and 3 only
D
2, 3 and 4
13 Equipment costing $20 000 was purchased on 1 January 2019. It has a useful working life of
5 years and a residual value of $3000. Depreciation using the straight-line method was included
in the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019.
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 of this error?
A
$2000 overstated
B
$2000 understated
C
$2600 overstated
D
$2600 understated
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/F/M/20
[Turn over
6
14 A business provided the following information about two expenses.
1 January 2019
$
amount paid during
year ended
31 December 2019
$
31 December 2019
$
electricity
240 accrued
1500
360 accrued
insurance
180 prepaid
1200
220 prepaid
Which amounts will be charged to the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019?
electricity
$
insurance
$
A
900
800
B
1380
1240
C
1620
1160
D
2100
1600
15 Anjum rents part of her premises to Ajay for $6120 per annum. At the beginning of the year Ajay
had paid two months rent in advance. At the end of the year Ajay had paid three months rent in
advance.
How much rent was received from Ajay during the year?
A
$3570
B
$5610
C
$6630
D
$8670
16 A business maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 5% of trade receivables. The balance on
the provision for doubtful debts account on 31 December 2018 was $2700.
On 31 December 2019 the trade receivables amounted to $50 000.
How will the provision for doubtful debts be recorded on 31 December 2019?
provision for
doubtful debts account
$
income statement
$
A
credit
200
added to gross profit
200
B
credit
200
deducted from gross profit
200
C
debit
200
added to gross profit
200
D
debit
200
deducted from gross profit
200
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/F/M/20
7
17 At the end of the financial year Cindy valued her inventory at cost. This valuation incorrectly
included damaged goods costing $300. Cindy estimated these goods could be sold for $100.
What is the effect of correcting the inventory valuation?
gross profit
profit for the year
current assets
A
decreases by $200
decreases by $200
decrease by $200
B
decreases by $300
decreases by $300
decrease by $300
C
increases by $100
increases by $100
decrease by $100
D
increases by $200
increases by $200
decrease by $200
18 Hassan had the following assets on 31 January 2020.
$
premises
12 000
inventory
500
balance at bank
360
goodwill
3 000
cash
120
There were no liabilities on 31 January 2020.
Which entries will be made in Hassan’s statement of financial position on 31 January 2020?
intangible
assets
$
non-current
assets
$
current
assets
$
capital
$
A
nil
12 000
980
12 980
B
nil
15 000
480
15 480
C
3000
12 000
980
15 980
D
3000
15 000
480
18 480
19 AB Stores had the following transactions.
1
The owner invested a further $20 000 capital.
2
$2000 was paid to trade payables.
3
A long-term loan of $5000 was repaid.
By how much would the working capital increase after these transactions?
A
$13 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$15 000
C
$20 000
0452/12/F/M/20
D
$27 000
[Turn over
8
20 The balances in the books of a business included the following.
$
goodwill
10 000
premises
25 000
trade receivables
9 500
trade payables
6 000
inventory
15 000
cash at bank
500 debit
long-term loan
5 000
What was the capital employed?
A
$50 000
B
$54 000
C
$60 000
D
$65 000
21 What is a disadvantage of operating a business as a partnership?
A
Partners may not agree on how to run the business.
B
Partners may not have the same skills.
C
The financial statements must be published.
D
The risks and responsibilities are shared.
22 What does not affect the total equity of a limited company?
A
issue of ordinary shares
B
ordinary share dividend paid
C
profit for the year
D
transfer from retained earnings to general reserve
23 What is called-up share capital?
A
the amount received by the company for issued shares
B
the amount requested from shareholders by the company
C
the value of shares the company could issue
D
the value of shares actually issued by the company
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/F/M/20
9
24 A limited company provided the following information.
$
issued share capital (50 000 ordinary shares of $1 each)
50 000
profit for the year ended 31 December 2019
13 000
transfer to general reserve on 31 December 2019
6 000
interim ordinary share dividend paid during the year
3 000
On 31 December 2019 it was decided to use the remaining profit to pay a final ordinary share
dividend.
What percentage final dividend would the ordinary shareholders receive?
A
8%
B
14%
C
20%
D
26%
25 A cricket club set up a snack bar on 1 January 2019.
The following information is available.
$
for the year ended 31 December 2019
receipts from sales of snacks
3250
cost of purchases of snacks
2500
wages of snack bar assistant
250
at 31 December 2019
cost of snacks unsold
520
What was the profit made by the snack bar?
A
$500
© UCLES 2020
B
$750
C
$1020
0452/12/F/M/20
D
$1270
[Turn over
10
26 A social club had the following assets and liabilities.
$
non-current assets
6550
cafe expenses owing
25
subscriptions owing by members
50
balance at bank
500 debit
owing to credit suppliers
300
cafe inventory
500
What was the accumulated fund?
A
$6275
B
$6325
27 A manufacturing business
30 November 2019
C
provided
$7175
the
following
D
$7275
information
for
the
year
ended
$
factory supervisor’s salary
factory power
25 000
5 000
machinery depreciation
11 000
machinery operators’ wages
29 000
raw materials consumed
82 000
What was the total of the direct costs?
A
$111 000
B
$116 000
C
$127 000
D
$152 000
28 What would be included in the statement of financial position of a manufacturing business but not
a wholesale business?
A
cash
B
office equipment
C
trade receivables
D
work in progress
29 The average inventory of a business was $40 000. The rate of inventory turnover was 5 times a
year. Mark-up was 20%.
What was the revenue for the year?
A
$160 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$200 000
C
$240 000
0452/12/F/M/20
D
$250 000
11
30 Sumit does not maintain a full set of accounting records.
What does Sumit not need to calculate his credit sales?
A
customer’s dishonoured cheque
B
discounts allowed
C
discounts received
D
returns from credit customers
31 Jake had current liabilities of trade payables and had current assets of inventory, trade
receivables and cash at bank.
Which measure would improve his current ratio?
A
buying additional inventory and paying in cash
B
decreasing drawings
C
revaluing non-current assets
D
selling inventory on credit rather than for cash
32 Flo and Mo are traders selling similar goods at similar prices. They provided the following
information.
Flo
Mo
gross margin
50%
40%
profit margin
10%
8%
Which trader has better control of cost of sales and expenses?
costs of sales
expenses
A
Flo
Flo
B
Flo
Mo
C
Mo
Flo
D
Mo
Mo
33 Which is an application of the materiality principle?
A
always using the straight-line method when depreciating assets
B
buying raw materials on credit rather than paying immediately
C
charging the cost of light bulbs and batteries to operating expenses
D
recording goods sold only when its legal title passes to the buyer
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/F/M/20
[Turn over
12
34 Which accounting principle states that revenue should not be recorded before it is earned?
A
consistency
B
matching
C
money measurement
D
realisation
35 Which accounting objective requires that financial statements are free from bias and errors?
A
comparability
B
relevance
C
reliability
D
understandability
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/F/M/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
ACCOUNTING
0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*9287386594*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 06_0452_11/4RP
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
2
Which statement is correct?
A
Accounting involves measuring profits and losses.
B
Accounting is the recording of financial transactions.
C
Book-keeping involves communicating financial data.
D
Book-keeping requires the use of ratio analysis.
The balances remaining on the books of a business after the preparation of the income statement
included the following.
$
loan from XY Finance
10 000
wages due
620
rent prepaid
240
trade receivables
3 300
trade payables
4 650
motor vehicles
8 000
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
2 000
What was the total of the liabilities?
A
3
$13 920
B
$14 890
C
$15 270
D
$17 270
On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.
What entry would Nina make on 12 April?
account to be debited
account to be credited
A
irrecoverable debts
bank
B
irrecoverable debts
Zaffar
C
provision for doubtful debts
Zaffar
D
Zaffar
bank
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
3
4
Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.
April 2
14
Ann returned goods, $30, to Cindy.
Ann bought goods, $210, from Cindy, and paid in cash.
Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?
5
A
Ann owes Cindy $490.
B
Ann owes Cindy $700.
C
Cindy owes Ann $490.
D
Cindy owes Ann $700.
Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.
Where will Tumelo record the return of goods?
6
A
cash book and sales ledger
B
general ledger only
C
general ledger and purchases ledger
D
purchases ledger only
Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.
$
April 7 invoice
360
12 cheque (after deducting $11 cash discount)
429
13 debit note
50
15 credit note
50
What was the closing balance on the statement of account on 30 April?
A
7
$260
B
$310
C
$321
D
$421
What is recorded in the sales journal?
A
all money received from sales
B
all sales transactions
C
cash sales transactions
D
credit sales transactions
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
[Turn over
4
8
9
Which statement about a two-column cash book is correct?
A
It is a ledger account for bank transactions only.
B
It is a ledger account for cash transactions only.
C
It is a book of prime entry.
D
It records cash discounts.
Which statements about trade discount are correct?
A
1
It is debited to the supplier’s account.
2
It is only given if the invoice is paid within the period allowed by the supplier.
3
It is shown as a deduction from the price of the goods on an invoice.
4
It is used to encourage bulk buying.
1 and 2
B
1 and 3
C
2 and 4
D
3 and 4
10 Why is a trial balance prepared?
A
to analyse the financial information
B
to assist preparation of financial statements
C
to control the costs of the business
D
to evaluate the performance of the business
11 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.
1
No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid, $480.
2
No entry had been made for bank charges, $620.
What was the correct loss for the year?
A
$14 900
© UCLES 2020
B
$15 860
C
$16 140
0452/11/M/J/20
D
$17 100
5
12 Peter’s bank statement showed a debit balance of $600 on 1 April. The following transactions
took place in April.
$
total cheque deposits
7400
total cheque payments
6200
direct debit for insurance premium
180
credit transfer from customer
450
What was the bank statement balance on 30 April?
A
$870 credit
B
$870 debit
C
$2070 credit
D
$2070 debit
13 A sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $10 000.
It was found that a $2000 contra entry to the purchases ledger control account had been entered
on the wrong side of the sales ledger control account.
What was the correct debit balance on the sales ledger control account?
A
$6000
B
$8000
C
$12 000
D
$14 000
14 A business had a new extension to its workshop premises. It incurred the following expenditure.
$
building cost
65 000
legal fees
1 800
air conditioning system for the original workshop
2 300
air conditioning system for the new workshop extension
1 100
decorating the original workshop
1 400
decorating the new workshop extension
800
What was the total capital expenditure of the business?
A
$67 900
© UCLES 2020
B
$70 200
C
$71 000
0452/11/M/J/20
D
$72 400
[Turn over
6
15 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.
cost
$20 000
working life
4 years
residual value
$4000
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?
A
decrease by $2000
B
increase by $2000
C
decrease by $6000
D
increase by $6000
16 A company’s financial year ended on 31 December 2019. On 1 December 2019 it paid rent,
$8000, for the four months ending 31 March 2020.
What was the opening balance on the rent account on 1 January 2020?
A
$2000 credit
B
$2000 debit
C
$6000 credit
D
$6000 debit
17 Alice’s financial year ends on 31 December.
The balances on her books on 1 January 2020 included the following.
$
commission receivable
250 debit
rent receivable
500 credit
What do these balances represent?
commission receivable
rent receivable
A
income outstanding
income outstanding
B
income outstanding
income prepaid
C
income prepaid
income outstanding
D
income prepaid
income prepaid
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
7
18 Joseph sells goods on credit and maintains a provision for doubtful debts. He wants to increase
his provision for doubtful debts by $250.
Which journal entry records an increase in the provision for doubtful debts?
debit
$
A
B
C
D
credit customer
income statement
250
income statement
credit customer
250
income statement
provision for doubtful debts
250
provision for doubtful debts
income statement
250
credit
$
250
250
250
250
19 Which items are deducted from the gross profit when calculating the profit for the year?
A
1
balance on the provision for doubtful debts account
2
carriage paid on goods supplied to customers
3
drawings made by the owner during the year
4
wages paid to employees during the year
1, 2 and 3
B
1 and 4
C
2 and 3 only
D
2 and 4
20 On 31 December 2019 John had net assets of $2000 and capital of $2000.
On 1 January 2020, goods costing $140 were sold on credit for $220.
What was the effect of this transaction on the statement of financial position?
net assets
capital
$
$
A
80 decrease
80 decrease
B
80 increase
80 increase
C
220 decrease
220 decrease
D
220 increase
220 increase
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
[Turn over
8
21 At the end of his financial year, Raminder made an adjustment for rent owed by a tenant.
How did this affect Raminder’s financial statements?
profit for
the year
current assets
A
decrease
decrease
B
decrease
increase
C
increase
decrease
D
increase
increase
22 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.
What was the effect of this error?
profit for the year
capital employed
A
overstated
no effect
B
overstated
understated
C
understated
no effect
D
understated
overstated
23 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.
They provided the following information.
Rajid
capital introduced 1 January 2019
Sunil
$40 000
$20 000
$5 000
$3 500
50%
50%
during the year ended 31 December 2019
drawings
share of work
They decided to draw up a partnership agreement for future years.
Which item would be most beneficial to Rajid in 2020?
A
interest on capital
B
interest on drawings
C
limit on annual drawings
D
partnership salaries
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
9
24 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.
$
salary
8000
drawings
2800
share of profit
4600
The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.
What was the closing balance on his current account?
A
$30 000
B
$38 000
C
$40 800
D
$43 600
25 Which item is shown in the income statement of a company and statement of changes in equity?
A
interest on debentures accrued
B
ordinary share dividend paid
C
profit for the year
D
transfer to general reserve
26 Hassan’s capital decreased by $200 over the year, even though he made a profit of $7000.
Which transactions caused this?
capital introduced
$
drawings
$
A
1000
8200
B
1200
6000
C
2000
8800
D
2200
4600
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
[Turn over
10
27 Ahmed provided the following information.
$
trade receivables at 1 January 2019
15 000
for the year ended 31 December 2019:
credit sales
85 000
cash sales
12 000
cheques received from trade receivables
65 000
irrecoverable debts
2 000
By how much had the trade receivables increased by the end of the financial year?
A
$18 000
B
$30 000
C
$33 000
D
$45 000
28 Gordon provided the following information for the year.
revenue
$90 000
opening inventory
$8 000
closing inventory
$2 000
mark up
50%
Gordon took goods, $7000, for his own use.
What were the purchases?
A
$43 000
B
$47 000
C
$54 000
D
$61 000
29 A trader provided the following information.
$
for the year ended 31 March 2020
revenue
250 000
purchases: cash
125 000
credit
115 000
at March 2020
trade payables
9 765
What was the trade payables turnover?
A
14 days
© UCLES 2020
B
15 days
C
29 days
0452/11/M/J/20
D
31 days
11
30 On 1 January 2019 current assets totalled $16 000 and the current ratio was 2 : 1.
On 31 December 2019 the current liabilities had increased by 50% and the current ratio was
1.5 : 1.
What was the value of the current assets on 31 December 2019?
A
$16 000
B
$18 000
C
$32 000
D
$36 000
31 A company provided the following information about its liquid (acid test) ratio.
Year 1 1.2 : 1
Year 2 1.4 : 1
Year 3 1.6 : 1
Which would explain the changes in the ratio?
A
Inventory is increasing.
B
Other payables are decreasing.
C
Trade payables are increasing.
D
Trade receivables are decreasing.
32 Which user of accounting statements is interested in past performance and taking remedial action
where necessary?
A
government
B
investors
C
managers
D
suppliers
33 Rashid’s financial year ends on 31 December. He paid rent on 1 February, 1 May, 1 August and
1 November.
An adjustment was made in the income statement for rent prepaid.
Which accounting principle was applied?
A
duality
B
matching
C
money measurement
D
prudence
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
[Turn over
12
34 Which statement describes the going concern principle?
A
Accounting methods must be used consistently from one accounting period to the next.
B
It is assumed that the business will continue to operate for the foreseeable future.
C
Revenue is earned when legal title to goods passes from the seller to the buyer.
D
The business is treated as being completely separate from the owner of the business.
35 Brad purchased a machine for $1000 on 1 January 2019. The machine was expected to last for
four years and have no residual value. On 31 December 2019 the same machine cost $1200 to
purchase.
At which value should the machine be included in the statement of financial position on
31 December 2019?
A
current cost with no depreciation
B
current cost with one year’s depreciation
C
original purchase price with no depreciation
D
original purchase price with one year’s depreciation
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0452/11/M/J/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
ACCOUNTING
0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*3976346872*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 06_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
Which are examples of book-keeping?
A
2
3
1
entering details of a cheque received from a customer in a cash book
2
entering details of goods purchased on credit in a purchases journal
3
producing an income statement to calculate the profit for the year
4
recording details of credit sales in the account of a credit customer
1, 2 and 3
B
1, 2 and 4
C
1 and 2 only
D
3 and 4
How does a trader use the information provided by financial statements?
A
to calculate the amount of cash drawings taken
B
to calculate the amount that is owed by trade receivables
C
to check the balance shown on a bank statement
D
to compare the business performance over a number of years
A trader bought new fixtures. He paid half of the purchase price in cash and agreed to pay the
balance in two months’ time.
How does this purchase affect the accounting equation?
4
assets
owner’s
equity
liabilities
A
decrease
decrease
no effect
B
decrease
no effect
increase
C
increase
decrease
increase
D
increase
no effect
increase
On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.
What entry would Nina make on 12 April?
account to be debited
account to be credited
A
irrecoverable debts
bank
B
irrecoverable debts
Zaffar
C
provision for doubtful debts
Zaffar
D
Zaffar
bank
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/M/J/20
3
5
Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.
April 2
14
Ann returned goods, $30, to Cindy.
Ann bought goods, $210, from Cindy, and paid in cash.
Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?
6
A
Ann owes Cindy $490.
B
Ann owes Cindy $700.
C
Cindy owes Ann $490.
D
Cindy owes Ann $700.
Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.
Where will Tumelo record the return of goods?
7
A
cash book and sales ledger
B
general ledger only
C
general ledger and purchases ledger
D
purchases ledger only
Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.
$
April 7 invoice
360
12 cheque (after deducting $11 cash discount)
429
13 debit note
50
15 credit note
50
What was the closing balance on the statement of account on 30 April?
A
$260
© UCLES 2020
B
$310
C
$321
0452/12/M/J/20
D
$421
[Turn over
4
8
A business sold goods with a list price of $50 each.
The terms of trade were:
trade discount for more than 20 items bought
10%
cash discount if customer pays within 30 days
4%
How much was received in full settlement from a customer who bought 25 items and paid after
35 days?
A
9
$900
B
$1075
C
$1125
D
$1200
Paul rents premises from John and pays the rent by credit transfer.
How would John record this?
account debited
account credited
A
bank
rent receivable
B
cash
rent receivable
C
rent receivable
bank
D
rent receivable
cash
10 Sita discovers that $1000 received from the sale of fixtures had been entered in the sales
account.
Which journal entry corrected this error?
debit
$
A
bank
disposal of fixtures
1000
B
bank
fixtures
1000
C
sales
disposal of fixtures
1000
D
sales
fixtures
1000
© UCLES 2020
credit
$
1000
1000
1000
1000
0452/12/M/J/20
5
11 The totals of a trial balance did not agree and $200 was debited to a suspense account. On
checking the books it was found that two errors had been made.
1
A sales invoice for $700 had been recorded in the sales journal as $770.
2
The sales journal had been totalled incorrectly.
What was the error made in totalling the sales journal?
A
overcast by $130
B
overcast by $200
C
undercast by $130
D
undercast by $200
12 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.
1
No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid, $480.
2
No entry had been made for bank charges, $620.
What was the correct loss for the year?
A
$14 900
B
$15 860
C
$16 140
D
$17 100
13 What would result in a cash book balance being lower than the balance showing on a bank
statement?
A
A cheque received from a customer was not recorded in the bank statement.
B
A customer’s cheque dishonoured by the bank appeared only on the bank statement.
C
Payment by a customer directly into the bank was not recorded in the cash book.
D
Payment of insurance by standing order was not recorded in the cash book.
14 Thembi is preparing her sales ledger control account. She needs to know:
1
The total for goods which have been returned by credit customers.
2
The amount owed by credit customers which have been written off as irrecoverable.
Where can she obtain this information?
goods returned
irrecoverable debts
A
purchase returns account
irrecoverable debts account
B
purchase returns journal
general journal
C
sales returns account
irrecoverable debts account
D
sales returns journal
general journal
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/M/J/20
[Turn over
6
15 The following payments were made when a new machine was purchased.
$
cost of the machine
32 000
charge for delivering the machine
1 800
insurance of the machine
2 000
wages of employees installing the machine
1 300
How much was the capital expenditure?
A
$32 000
B
$33 300
C
$35 100
D
$37 100
16 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.
cost
$20 000
working life
4 years
residual value
$4000
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?
A
decrease by $2000
B
increase by $2000
C
decrease by $6000
D
increase by $6000
17 Elzevir purchased a motor vehicle costing $8000 on 1 January 2018. It is depreciated at 40% on
the reducing balance basis.
Which journal entry records the depreciation for the year ended 31 December 2019?
debit
A
B
C
D
© UCLES 2020
income statement
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
1920
income statement
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
3200
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
motor vehicles
1920
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
motor vehicles
3200
0452/12/M/J/20
credit
1920
3200
1920
3200
7
18 Alice’s financial year ends on 31 December.
The balances on her books on 1 January 2020 included the following.
$
commission receivable
250 debit
rent receivable
500 credit
What do these balances represent?
commission receivable
rent receivable
A
income outstanding
income outstanding
B
income outstanding
income prepaid
C
income prepaid
income outstanding
D
income prepaid
income prepaid
19 Annual rental income due from Kumar, a tenant, is $3600. At the start of the year Kumar had
prepaid rent of $900. At the end of the year he owed two months’ rent.
How much rent was received from Kumar during the year?
A
$2100
B
$3300
C
$3900
D
$5100
20 Joel’s inventory on 31 December 2019 was valued at $4800. It was discovered that:
1
Goods, cost $100, had not been included.
2
Goods, cost $170, had been included at net realisable value $210.
What was the effect of the incorrect inventory valuation on Joel’s financial statements at
31 December 2019?
profit for
the year
$
inventory
$
equity
A
overstated
40
understated
40
nil
B
overstated
60
understated
60
nil
C
understated
40
understated
40
understated
40
D
understated
60
understated
60
understated
60
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/M/J/20
$
[Turn over
8
21 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.
What was the effect of this error?
profit for the year
capital employed
A
overstated
no effect
B
overstated
understated
C
understated
no effect
D
understated
overstated
22 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.
They provided the following information.
Rajid
capital introduced 1 January 2019
Sunil
$40 000
$20 000
$5 000
$3 500
50%
50%
during the year ended 31 December 2019
drawings
share of work
They decided to draw up a partnership agreement for future years.
Which item would be most beneficial to Rajid in 2020?
A
interest on capital
B
interest on drawings
C
limit on annual drawings
D
partnership salaries
23 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.
$
salary
8000
drawings
2800
share of profit
4600
The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.
What was the closing balance on his current account?
A
$30 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$38 000
C
$40 800
0452/12/M/J/20
D
$43 600
9
24 The statement of financial position of X Limited at 31 December 2018 included the following:
$
ordinary share capital
40 000
general reserve
8 000
retained earnings
65 000
8% debentures (repayable 2025)
30 000
Profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 was $42 000 and dividends paid totalled $10 000.
What was the total equity on 31 December 2019?
A
$137 000
B
$145 000
C
$155 000
D
$175 000
25 Which is a feature of debentures?
A
are a long-term liability of a company
B
carry a fixed rate of dividend
C
carry voting rights
D
on liquidation are paid back after shareholders
26 Which cost is part of the prime cost for a manufacturing business?
A
carriage inwards
B
carriage outwards
C
factory rent
D
factory supervisor’s salary
27 A manufacturing business provided the following information.
$
prime cost
236 000
factory overheads
42 000
opening work in progress
8 000
closing work in progress
6 000
What was the factory cost of production?
A
$234 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$238 000
C
$276 000
0452/12/M/J/20
D
$280 000
[Turn over
10
28 A trader provided the following information.
$
trade receivables at start of the year
5 000
trade receivables at end of the year
8 500
cash received from trade receivables
34 700
irrecoverable debts written off
200
discount allowed
185
What was the amount of the credit sales?
A
$38 200
B
$38 385
C
$38 400
D
$38 585
29 Gordon provided the following information for the year.
revenue
$90 000
opening inventory
$8 000
closing inventory
$2 000
mark up
50%
Gordon took goods, $7000, for his own use.
What were the purchases?
A
$43 000
B
$47 000
C
$54 000
D
$61 000
30 Sabelo’s liquid (acid test) ratio was higher on 1 January 2019 than it was on 31 December 2019.
What could have caused this?
A
bank overdraft decreased
B
inventory decreased
C
other payables decreased
D
trade receivables decreased
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/M/J/20
11
31 The following ratios have been calculated for a trader.
profit margin
return on capital employed (ROCE)
year 1
year 2
15%
20%
9%
6%
What explains these changes?
A
Drawings have increased by more than profit for the year.
B
Gross profit has increased but profit for the year has decreased.
C
Profit for the year has increased and capital has been introduced.
D
Profit for the year has increased and a long-term loan has been repaid.
32 Which external parties would be interested in the accounting ratios of a business?
A
government
B
investors
C
managers
D
tax authorities
33 At the end of the financial year, a company did not account for the unused stationary valued
at $50.
Which accounting principle did the company apply?
A
matching
B
materiality
C
money measurement
D
prudence
34 A trader wrote off the balance on a credit customer’s account as irrecoverable.
Which accounting principle was applied?
A
business entity
B
consistency
C
money measurement
D
prudence
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/M/J/20
[Turn over
12
35 A limited company applied the accounting objective of comparability in preparing its financial
statements.
What is the effect of this on the interested parties?
A
They can be sure that information in the financial statements is up to date.
B
They can identify similarities with the financial statements of other businesses.
C
They can understand the financial statements easily.
D
They can use the financial statements in decision-making.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/M/J/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
ACCOUNTING
0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*4322546424*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 06_0452_13/FP
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
Which are examples of book-keeping?
A
2
3
1
entering details of a cheque received from a customer in a cash book
2
entering details of goods purchased on credit in a purchases journal
3
producing an income statement to calculate the profit for the year
4
recording details of credit sales in the account of a credit customer
1, 2 and 3
B
1, 2 and 4
C
1 and 2 only
D
3 and 4
How does a trader use the information provided by financial statements?
A
to calculate the amount of cash drawings taken
B
to calculate the amount that is owed by trade receivables
C
to check the balance shown on a bank statement
D
to compare the business performance over a number of years
A trader bought new fixtures. He paid half of the purchase price in cash and agreed to pay the
balance in two months’ time.
How does this purchase affect the accounting equation?
4
assets
owner’s
equity
liabilities
A
decrease
decrease
no effect
B
decrease
no effect
increase
C
increase
decrease
increase
D
increase
no effect
increase
On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.
What entry would Nina make on 12 April?
account to be debited
account to be credited
A
irrecoverable debts
bank
B
irrecoverable debts
Zaffar
C
provision for doubtful debts
Zaffar
D
Zaffar
bank
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/M/J/20
3
5
Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.
April 2
14
Ann returned goods, $30, to Cindy.
Ann bought goods, $210, from Cindy, and paid in cash.
Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?
6
A
Ann owes Cindy $490.
B
Ann owes Cindy $700.
C
Cindy owes Ann $490.
D
Cindy owes Ann $700.
Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.
Where will Tumelo record the return of goods?
7
A
cash book and sales ledger
B
general ledger only
C
general ledger and purchases ledger
D
purchases ledger only
Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.
$
April 7 invoice
360
12 cheque (after deducting $11 cash discount)
429
13 debit note
50
15 credit note
50
What was the closing balance on the statement of account on 30 April?
A
$260
© UCLES 2020
B
$310
C
$321
0452/13/M/J/20
D
$421
[Turn over
4
8
A business sold goods with a list price of $50 each.
The terms of trade were:
trade discount for more than 20 items bought
10%
cash discount if customer pays within 30 days
4%
How much was received in full settlement from a customer who bought 25 items and paid after
35 days?
A
9
$900
B
$1075
C
$1125
D
$1200
Paul rents premises from John and pays the rent by credit transfer.
How would John record this?
account debited
account credited
A
bank
rent receivable
B
cash
rent receivable
C
rent receivable
bank
D
rent receivable
cash
10 Sita discovers that $1000 received from the sale of fixtures had been entered in the sales
account.
Which journal entry corrected this error?
debit
$
A
bank
disposal of fixtures
1000
B
bank
fixtures
1000
C
sales
disposal of fixtures
1000
D
sales
fixtures
1000
© UCLES 2020
credit
$
1000
1000
1000
1000
0452/13/M/J/20
5
11 The totals of a trial balance did not agree and $200 was debited to a suspense account. On
checking the books it was found that two errors had been made.
1
A sales invoice for $700 had been recorded in the sales journal as $770.
2
The sales journal had been totalled incorrectly.
What was the error made in totalling the sales journal?
A
overcast by $130
B
overcast by $200
C
undercast by $130
D
undercast by $200
12 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.
1
No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid, $480.
2
No entry had been made for bank charges, $620.
What was the correct loss for the year?
A
$14 900
B
$15 860
C
$16 140
D
$17 100
13 What would result in a cash book balance being lower than the balance showing on a bank
statement?
A
A cheque received from a customer was not recorded in the bank statement.
B
A customer’s cheque dishonoured by the bank appeared only on the bank statement.
C
Payment by a customer directly into the bank was not recorded in the cash book.
D
Payment of insurance by standing order was not recorded in the cash book.
14 Thembi is preparing her sales ledger control account. She needs to know:
1
The total for goods which have been returned by credit customers.
2
The amount owed by credit customers which have been written off as irrecoverable.
Where can she obtain this information?
goods returned
irrecoverable debts
A
purchase returns account
irrecoverable debts account
B
purchase returns journal
general journal
C
sales returns account
irrecoverable debts account
D
sales returns journal
general journal
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/M/J/20
[Turn over
6
15 The following payments were made when a new machine was purchased.
$
cost of the machine
32 000
charge for delivering the machine
1 800
insurance of the machine
2 000
wages of employees installing the machine
1 300
How much was the capital expenditure?
A
$32 000
B
$33 300
C
$35 100
D
$37 100
16 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.
cost
$20 000
working life
4 years
residual value
$4000
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?
A
decrease by $2000
B
increase by $2000
C
decrease by $6000
D
increase by $6000
17 Elzevir purchased a motor vehicle costing $8000 on 1 January 2018. It is depreciated at 40% on
the reducing balance basis.
Which journal entry records the depreciation for the year ended 31 December 2019?
debit
A
B
C
D
© UCLES 2020
income statement
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
1920
income statement
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
3200
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
motor vehicles
1920
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles
motor vehicles
3200
0452/13/M/J/20
credit
1920
3200
1920
3200
7
18 Alice’s financial year ends on 31 December.
The balances on her books on 1 January 2020 included the following.
$
commission receivable
250 debit
rent receivable
500 credit
What do these balances represent?
commission receivable
rent receivable
A
income outstanding
income outstanding
B
income outstanding
income prepaid
C
income prepaid
income outstanding
D
income prepaid
income prepaid
19 Annual rental income due from Kumar, a tenant, is $3600. At the start of the year Kumar had
prepaid rent of $900. At the end of the year he owed two months’ rent.
How much rent was received from Kumar during the year?
A
$2100
B
$3300
C
$3900
D
$5100
20 Joel’s inventory on 31 December 2019 was valued at $4800. It was discovered that:
1
Goods, cost $100, had not been included.
2
Goods, cost $170, had been included at net realisable value $210.
What was the effect of the incorrect inventory valuation on Joel’s financial statements at
31 December 2019?
profit for
the year
$
inventory
$
equity
A
overstated
40
understated
40
nil
B
overstated
60
understated
60
nil
C
understated
40
understated
40
understated
40
D
understated
60
understated
60
understated
60
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/M/J/20
$
[Turn over
8
21 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.
What was the effect of this error?
profit for the year
capital employed
A
overstated
no effect
B
overstated
understated
C
understated
no effect
D
understated
overstated
22 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.
They provided the following information.
Rajid
capital introduced 1 January 2019
Sunil
$40 000
$20 000
$5 000
$3 500
50%
50%
during the year ended 31 December 2019
drawings
share of work
They decided to draw up a partnership agreement for future years.
Which item would be most beneficial to Rajid in 2020?
A
interest on capital
B
interest on drawings
C
limit on annual drawings
D
partnership salaries
23 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.
$
salary
8000
drawings
2800
share of profit
4600
The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.
What was the closing balance on his current account?
A
$30 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$38 000
C
$40 800
0452/13/M/J/20
D
$43 600
9
24 The statement of financial position of X Limited at 31 December 2018 included the following:
$
ordinary share capital
40 000
general reserve
8 000
retained earnings
65 000
8% debentures (repayable 2025)
30 000
Profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 was $42 000 and dividends paid totalled $10 000.
What was the total equity on 31 December 2019?
A
$137 000
B
$145 000
C
$155 000
D
$175 000
25 Which is a feature of debentures?
A
are a long-term liability of a company
B
carry a fixed rate of dividend
C
carry voting rights
D
on liquidation are paid back after shareholders
26 Which cost is part of the prime cost for a manufacturing business?
A
carriage inwards
B
carriage outwards
C
factory rent
D
factory supervisor’s salary
27 A manufacturing business provided the following information.
$
prime cost
236 000
factory overheads
42 000
opening work in progress
8 000
closing work in progress
6 000
What was the factory cost of production?
A
$234 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$238 000
C
$276 000
0452/13/M/J/20
D
$280 000
[Turn over
10
28 A trader provided the following information.
$
trade receivables at start of the year
5 000
trade receivables at end of the year
8 500
cash received from trade receivables
34 700
irrecoverable debts written off
200
discount allowed
185
What was the amount of the credit sales?
A
$38 200
B
$38 385
C
$38 400
D
$38 585
29 Gordon provided the following information for the year.
revenue
$90 000
opening inventory
$8 000
closing inventory
$2 000
mark up
50%
Gordon took goods, $7000, for his own use.
What were the purchases?
A
$43 000
B
$47 000
C
$54 000
D
$61 000
30 Sabelo’s liquid (acid test) ratio was higher on 1 January 2019 than it was on 31 December 2019.
What could have caused this?
A
bank overdraft decreased
B
inventory decreased
C
other payables decreased
D
trade receivables decreased
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/M/J/20
11
31 The following ratios have been calculated for a trader.
profit margin
return on capital employed (ROCE)
year 1
year 2
15%
20%
9%
6%
What explains these changes?
A
Drawings have increased by more than profit for the year.
B
Gross profit has increased but profit for the year has decreased.
C
Profit for the year has increased and capital has been introduced.
D
Profit for the year has increased and a long-term loan has been repaid.
32 Which external parties would be interested in the accounting ratios of a business?
A
government
B
investors
C
managers
D
tax authorities
33 At the end of the financial year, a company did not account for the unused stationary valued
at $50.
Which accounting principle did the company apply?
A
matching
B
materiality
C
money measurement
D
prudence
34 A trader wrote off the balance on a credit customer’s account as irrecoverable.
Which accounting principle was applied?
A
business entity
B
consistency
C
money measurement
D
prudence
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/M/J/20
[Turn over
12
35 A limited company applied the accounting objective of comparability in preparing its financial
statements.
What is the effect of this on the interested parties?
A
They can be sure that information in the financial statements is up to date.
B
They can identify similarities with the financial statements of other businesses.
C
They can understand the financial statements easily.
D
They can use the financial statements in decision-making.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/M/J/20
*3830955640*
Cambridge IGCSE™
ACCOUNTING
0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*1786308326*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 11_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
A trader prepares financial statements each year.
What do these assist the trader to do?
2
3
A
calculate the amount owing to credit suppliers
B
calculate the cash drawings
C
check the bank statement balance
D
make decisions about the future
What is not an example of a book-keeping entry?
A
an entry made in the bank column of the cash book for a cheque received
B
cost of goods purchased on credit entered in the supplier’s account
C
expenses paid during the year entered in the income statement
D
goods returned by a customer entered in the sales returns journal
The following balances appeared in Hussein's books.
$
fixtures
6000
inventory
3300
trade receivables
3000
trade payables
4500
other receivables
500
other payables
300
loan to Imran
1000
bank overdraft
1400
What was the total of the liabilities?
A
4
$4800
B
$6200
C
$6400
What does the owner’s equity consist of?
A
the amount of money in the business bank account
B
the amount owed by the business to the owner
C
the total of the assets owned by the business
D
the total of the current assets less the current liabilities
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/O/N/20
D
$7200
3
5
Which entries did Sally make to record the following transaction?
Rashid, a credit customer, returned damaged goods.
6
account to
be debited
account to
be credited
A
purchase returns
Rashid
B
Rashid
purchase returns
C
sales returns
Rashid
D
Rashid
sales returns
The following account appeared in the books of Mary.
Paul account
$
April 1 balance b/d
14 sales
$
90
April 21 returns
150
30 bank
discount
balance c/d
240
25
88
2
125
240
Which statement is correct?
7
A
On 1 April Paul owed Mary $90.
B
On 14 April Paul sold goods, $150, to Mary.
C
On 21 April Mary returned goods, $25, to Paul.
D
On 30 April Mary owed Paul $125.
In which sections of Zamir’s ledger would the following accounts be maintained?
1
the sales account
2
the account of Harjit, a trade receivable
sales account
Harjit account
A
nominal (general) ledger
purchases ledger
B
nominal (general) ledger
sales ledger
C
purchases ledger
sales ledger
D
sales ledger
purchases ledger
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/O/N/20
[Turn over
4
8
Sue allows 2% cash discount to credit customers who settle their account within 28 days. Jane
purchased goods, list price $200, on 10 September. She returned these goods on 15 September.
Which entry would Sue make on 15 September?
9
A
purchases returns journal $196
B
purchases returns journal $200
C
sales returns journal $196
D
sales returns journal $200
A transaction was posted to the wrong account of the same class.
Which type of error was made?
A
commission
B
original entry
C
principle
D
reversal
10 Motor vehicle expenses, $50, were incorrectly debited to the motor vehicles account.
Which journal entry corrects this error?
debit
$
A
B
C
D
© UCLES 2020
motor vehicle expenses
motor vehicles
50
motor vehicles
motor vehicle expenses
50
motor vehicles expenses
motor vehicles
suspense
50
50
suspense
motor vehicles expenses
motor vehicles
credit
$
50
50
100
100
50
50
0452/12/O/N/20
5
11 Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.
She later discovered the following errors.
1
Rent prepaid by Kate was understated by $1000.
2
Closing inventory was understated by $1500.
What was the correct profit for the year?
A
$25 900
B
$27 900
C
$28 900
D
$30 900
12 A trader’s bank statement showed a credit balance of $2940. The following items had not been
entered in the cash book.
$
bank interest received
credit transfer
70
280
What was the debit balance in the cash book before it was updated?
A
$2590
B
$2730
C
$3150
D
$3290
13 What is a purpose of preparing a sales ledger control account?
A
to identify irrecoverable debts
B
to make fraud more difficult
C
to provide the total owed to trade payables
D
to show the total of cash and credit sales
14 George is preparing his purchases ledger control account.
Which information would he obtain from his general journal?
A
contra entries with the sales ledger
B
goods returned to credit suppliers
C
irrecoverable debts written off
D
refunds received from credit suppliers
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/O/N/20
[Turn over
6
15 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.
How did this error affect the financial statements?
profit for
the year
non-current
assets
A
overstated
overstated
B
overstated
understated
C
understated
overstated
D
understated
understated
16 Rashid provided the following information at 31 December.
$
machinery at cost
52 000
provision for depreciation of machinery
23 000
Depreciation for the year is calculated at 20% on cost.
After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.
What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?
A
$21 000
B
$22 600
C
$23 400
D
$25 000
17 A machine which cost $32 000 was sold for $14 000. The total depreciation at the date of disposal
was $15 000.
What was the profit or loss on disposal?
A
$3000 profit
B
$3000 loss
C
$18 000 profit
D
$18 000 loss
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/O/N/20
7
18 Beena maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of the trade receivables at the end of each
financial year.
On 1 September 2019 the provision for doubtful debts was $900.
On 31 August 2020 the trade receivables amounted to $42 800.
Which journal entry did Beena make on 31 August 2020?
debit
$
A
B
C
D
income statement
provision for doubtful debts
384
income statement
provision for doubtful debts
1284
credit
$
384
1284
provision for doubtful debts
income statement
384
provision for doubtful debts
income statement
1284
384
1284
19 Nirmal sells two products, product G and product H.
The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.
number
of units
product
cost price
per unit
net realisable
value per unit
G
1000
$2.00
$2.50
H
800
$1.50
$1.20
It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.
What was the total value of Nirmal’s inventory?
A
$2760
B
$3000
C
$3260
D
$3460
20 What is not a service business?
A
hairdressing salon
B
accountant’s practice
C
supermarket
D
computer repair shop
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/O/N/20
[Turn over
8
21 The financial year of Peter ends on 30 September. On 1 August 2020 Peter received rent $1000.
This covered the period from 1 July to 30 November 2020.
Which entry will be made in Peter’s statement of financial position on 30 September 2020?
A
current asset $400
B
current asset $500
C
current liability $400
D
current liability $500
22 In addition to a share of the profit a partner receives interest on capital, a salary and is charged
interest on drawings.
How are these recorded in the ledger accounts of the partner?
interest on capital
salary
interest on drawings
A
credit capital account
credit current account
debit capital account
B
credit current account
debit capital account
credit current account
C
credit current account
credit current account
debit current account
D
debit current account
debit current account
credit current account
23 A sports club provided the following information.
$
subscriptions for the year
26 800
profit on sale of refreshments
4 200
depreciation
1 500
rent and insurance
12 600
wages
3 200
What was the total income for the year?
A
$15 800
© UCLES 2020
B
$17 300
C
$22 600
0452/12/O/N/20
D
$31 000
9
24 A club was formed on 1 July 2019.
During the year ended 30 June 2020 subscriptions received from members totalled $2500.
This included $120 paid in advance for the next financial year. Subscriptions outstanding on
30 June 2020 amounted to $280.
How much was recorded for subscriptions in the income and expenditure account for the year
ended 30 June 2020?
A
$2100
B
$2500
C
$2660
D
$2780
25 Anthony does not keep a full set of accounting records. He knows his opening and closing cash
balances and wishes to calculate his cash sales.
Which item does Anthony not need in order to calculate his cash sales?
A
cash banked
B
cash discount
C
cash drawings
D
cash expenses
26 A trader has not maintained a full set of accounting records.
How can she calculate the credit sales for the year?
A
receipts from credit customers + closing trade receivables – discount allowed
– opening trade receivables
B
receipts from credit customers – closing trade receivables + discount allowed
+ opening trade receivables
C
receipts from credit customers – closing trade receivables – discount allowed
+ opening trade receivables
D
receipts from credit customers + closing trade receivables + discount allowed
– opening trade receivables
27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.
average inventory
$80 000
rate of inventory turnover
6 times
mark-up
25%
What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?
A
$360 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$480 000
C
$576 000
0452/12/O/N/20
D
$600 000
[Turn over
10
28 A company provided the following information about its current ratio.
year 1
2.3 : 1
year 2
2.4 : 1
year 3
2.5 : 1
What would explain the changes in the ratio?
A
Inventory is decreasing.
B
Other payables are increasing.
C
Other receivables are increasing.
D
Trade receivables are decreasing.
29 A trader wants to improve his gross margin.
How can this be done?
A
Reduce administrative expenses.
B
Reduce depreciation of equipment.
C
Reduce rate of cash discount allowed.
D
Reduce rate of trade discount allowed.
30 Meesha provided the following information for her first year of trading.
$
sales (1000 units at $10 each)
10 000
cost of sales (1000 units at $4.50 each)
4 500
gross profit
5 500
In her second year of trading, Meesha reduced the selling price and sold 1500 units. Her gross
profit decreased by $250. There was no change in the cost per unit.
What was the total value of sales in the second year of trading?
A
$9750
© UCLES 2020
B
$10 250
C
$12 000
0452/12/O/N/20
D
$12 500
11
31 AB Limited and CD Limited both started business on 1 January 2019 with an ordinary share
capital of $100 000. Neither company had any debentures or loans.
Both companies had the same profit in 2019.
Only AB Limited paid a dividend.
The return on capital employed (ROCE) was calculated using closing capital employed.
Which statement about AB Limited’s ROCE is correct when compared to that of CD Limited?
A
It is higher because the dividend reduced retained earnings.
B
It is lower because the dividend reduced capital employed.
C
It is lower because the dividend reduced the profit for the year.
D
It is the same as that of CD Limited.
32 Which interested party uses the financial statements of a business to assess current performance
and plan for future activities?
A
banks
B
employees
C
government
D
managers
33 The special skills of the employees are not recorded in the financial statements of a business.
Which accounting principle is being applied?
A
historic cost
B
materiality
C
money measurement
D
realisation
34 How can a business comply with the accounting principle of prudence?
assets
losses
A
avoid overstating
avoid overstating
B
avoid overstating
avoid understating
C
avoid understating
avoid overstating
D
avoid understating
avoid understating
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/O/N/20
[Turn over
12
35 What is not an aim of international accounting standards?
A
to ensure accounting standards in different countries agree
B
to establish an organisation to set standards in every country
C
to make it easier to compare companies’ financial statements
D
to reduce the variety of accounting practices worldwide
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0452/12/O/N/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
ACCOUNTING
0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*3825567397*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 11_0452_13/2RP
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
A trader prepares financial statements each year.
What do these assist the trader to do?
2
A
calculate the amount owing to credit suppliers
B
calculate the cash drawings
C
check the bank statement balance
D
make decisions about the future
The following balances appeared in Hussein's books.
$
fixtures
6000
inventory
3300
trade receivables
3000
trade payables
4500
other receivables
500
other payables
300
loan to Imran
1000
bank overdraft
1400
What was the total of the liabilities?
A
$4800
© UCLES 2020
B
$6200
C
$6400
0452/13/O/N/20
D
$7200
3
3
The following account appeared in the books of Mary.
Paul account
$
April 1 balance b/d
14 sales
90
$
April 21 returns
150
30 bank
25
88
discount
balance c/d
240
2
125
240
Which statement is correct?
4
5
A
On 1 April Paul owed Mary $90.
B
On 14 April Paul sold goods, $150, to Mary.
C
On 21 April Mary returned goods, $25, to Paul.
D
On 30 April Mary owed Paul $125.
Which business document is used to update the cash book for standing order payments?
A
bank statement
B
cheque counterfoil
C
paying-in slip
D
receipt
On 1 March 2020 the bank column of a cash book had a credit balance of $290.
During March cheques totalling $580 were received and cheques totalling $610 were paid to
suppliers. Bank charges of $12 incurred in February were also entered in the cash book.
What was the balance of the bank column in the cash book on 1 April 2020?
A
$248 credit
B
$248 debit
C
$332 credit
D
$332 debit
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
[Turn over
4
6
Ziningi prepared a trial balance. The total of the debit column was $225 750 and the total of the
credit column was $225 250.
What could explain the difference?
7
A
Bank overdraft, $250, was recorded as a debit balance.
B
Inventory, $500, was included as a debit balance.
C
Purchases returns, $250, were included as a credit balance.
D
Sales returns, $250, were included as a debit balance.
Rent received from a tenant was debited to the rent receivable account and credited to the cash
book.
Which type of error has been made?
8
A
commission
B
compensating
C
complete reversal
D
principle
A computer system purchased from Ace Computers for $1430 had been incorrectly recorded as
$1340 and was entered in the stationery account instead of the office equipment account.
Which journal entry corrects this error?
debit
$
A
B
C
D
Ace computers
stationery
office equipment
90
1340
Ace computers
stationery
office equipment
90
1340
office equipment
Ace computers
stationery
1340
office equipment
Ace computers
stationery
1430
© UCLES 2020
credit
$
1340
1430
90
1340
90
1340
0452/13/O/N/20
5
9
Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.
She later discovered the following errors.
1
Rent prepaid by Kate was understated by $1000.
2
Closing inventory was understated by $1500.
What was the correct profit for the year?
A
$25 900
B
$27 900
C
$28 900
D
$30 900
10 What would not be included in a sales ledger control account?
A
cash sales recorded in the cash book
B
cheques received from credit customers recorded in the cash book
C
goods sold on credit recorded in the sales journal
D
irrecoverable debts written off recorded in the journal
11 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.
How did this error affect the financial statements?
profit for
the year
non-current
assets
A
overstated
overstated
B
overstated
understated
C
understated
overstated
D
understated
understated
12 A trader uses the reducing balance method of depreciation.
What effect will this have over the life of the non-current asset?
A
depreciation charged evenly over the years
B
more depreciation charged in the early years
C
more depreciation charged in the later years
D
the non-current asset being revalued each year
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
[Turn over
6
13 Rashid provided the following information at 31 December.
$
machinery at cost
52 000
provision for depreciation of machinery
23 000
Depreciation for the year is calculated at 20% on cost.
After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.
What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?
A
$21 000
B
$22 600
C
$23 400
D
$25 000
14 At the end of his financial year on 31 August 2020 a trader had prepaid insurance.
How will this appear in the insurance account and the statement of financial position at
31 August 2020?
insurance account
statement of financial position
A
credit balance carried down
current asset
B
credit balance carried down
current liability
C
debit balance carried down
current asset
D
debit balance carried down
current liability
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
7
15 Hayley’s financial year ends on 30 September 2020. She provided the following information.
$
on 1 October 2019
rent receivable accrued
480
during the year ended 30 September 2020
rent received
6800
On 30 September 2020
rent received in advance
720
Which journal entry would be made on 30 September 2020?
debit
$
A
B
C
D
income statement
rent receivable
5600
income statement
rent receivable
6560
rent receivable
income statement
5600
rent receivable
income statement
6560
credit
$
5600
6560
5600
6560
16 The balances in the books of Jason on 1 July 2019 included the following.
$
trade receivables
provision for doubtful debts
64 200
1 284
Trade receivables at 30 June 2020 were $58 500, of which $500 should be written off as
irrecoverable.
Jason wants to maintain his provision for doubtful debts at 2% of trade receivables.
What was the change in the provision for doubtful debts at 30 June 2020?
A
$114 decrease
B
$124 decrease
C
$376 increase
D
$386 increase
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
[Turn over
8
17 Nirmal sells two products, product G and product H.
The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.
number
of units
product
cost price
per unit
net realisable
value per unit
G
1000
$2.00
$2.50
H
800
$1.50
$1.20
It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.
What was the total value of Nirmal’s inventory?
A
$2760
B
$3000
C
$3260
D
$3460
18 Which items will not be shown in an income statement prepared for a service business?
A
1
cost of sales
2
gross profit
3
profit for the year
4
wages paid to employees
1 only
B
1 and 2
C
2 and 4
D
3 and 4
19 A trader provided the following information.
$
capital at 1 October 2019
52 000
motor vehicle given to the business by the trader
3 500
personal expenses paid out of business bank account
1 500
cash drawings made during the year
500
What was the capital at 30 September 2020?
A
$46 500
© UCLES 2020
B
$50 000
C
$53 500
0452/13/O/N/20
D
$55 000
9
20 John and Mark are in partnership. Profits and losses are shared in the ratio 3 : 2. John is entitled
to an annual salary of $12 000. The profit for the year ended 31 August 2020 was $52 000.
How much would be credited to the partners’ current accounts on 31 August 2020?
John’s
current account
$
Mark’s
current account
$
A
24 000
16 000
B
26 000
26 000
C
31 200
20 800
D
36 000
16 000
21 A partnership maintains both current and capital accounts for each partner. An inexperienced
book-keeper prepared the following account which contains errors.
Owen capital account
$
balance c / d
$
135 000
balance b / d
100 000
loan made to partnership
interest on capital
135 000
30 000
5 000
135 000
What should appear as the closing balance on Owen’s capital account?
A
$75 000
B
$100 000
C
$105 000
D
$130 000
22 Z Limited provided the following information.
$
5% debentures
50 000
general reserve
25 000
issued ordinary share capital
300 000
retained earnings
75 000
short-term bank loan
10 000
What was the equity?
A
$325 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$400 000
C
$450 000
0452/13/O/N/20
D
$460 000
[Turn over
10
23 Which statement about preference shares is not correct?
A
Preference shareholders do not have voting rights.
B
Preference shareholders receive a fixed dividend.
C
Preference shareholders have a prior claim before ordinary shareholders in the event of
liquidation.
D
Preference shareholders receive their dividend after the ordinary shareholders have been
paid.
24 A sports club was formed on 1 September 2019.
What may appear in the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31 August 2020?
A
closing bank balance
B
closing inventory of club shop
C
depreciation of sports equipment
D
subscriptions in arrears
25 A manufacturing company provided the following information.
$
cost of raw materials
186 000
direct wages
75 000
machinery depreciation
45 000
factory supervisor’s salary
32 000
factory rent
24 000
machinery repairs
18 000
What was the prime cost of manufacturing?
A
$186 000
© UCLES 2020
B
$261 000
C
$293 000
0452/13/O/N/20
D
$380 000
11
26 A manufacturer’s work in progress at the start of the year was valued at $850. At the end of the
year it was valued at $10 200.
What was the effect of this increase on the cost of production and the cost of sales?
cost of
production
cost of
sales
A
decrease
decrease
B
decrease
increase
C
increase
decrease
D
increase
increase
27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.
average inventory
$80 000
rate of inventory turnover
6 times
mark-up
25%
What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?
A
$360 000
B
$480 000
C
$576 000
D
$600 000
28 Kim’s trade payables turnover increased.
What could have caused this?
A
Kim’s customers took longer to pay their accounts.
B
Kim’s credit purchases increased.
C
Kim’s sales revenue increased.
D
Kim took longer to pay her credit suppliers.
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
[Turn over
12
29 A company provided the following information about its rate of inventory turnover.
year 1
24 times
year 2
25 times
year 3
27 times
What would explain the changes in the ratio?
A
cost of sales is decreasing
B
inventory is increasing
C
sales volume is increasing
D
selling price is increasing
30 A company provided the following information about its current ratio.
year 1
2.3 : 1
year 2
2.4 : 1
year 3
2.5 : 1
What would explain the changes in the ratio?
A
Inventory is decreasing.
B
Other payables are increasing.
C
Other receivables are increasing.
D
Trade receivables are decreasing.
31 A trader wants to improve his gross margin.
How can this be done?
A
Reduce administrative expenses.
B
Reduce depreciation of equipment.
C
Reduce rate of cash discount allowed.
D
Reduce rate of trade discount allowed.
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
13
32 Zak has depreciated his machinery at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method.
At 31 December 2018 the statement of financial position included:
$
machinery at cost
30 000
depreciation to date
12 000
18 000
On 31 December 2019 Zak was considering calculating the annual depreciation at 20% per
annum on the net book value of the machinery.
Which statement is correct?
A
depreciation would be $3600 applying the consistency principle
B
depreciation would be $3600 applying the prudence principle
C
depreciation would be $6000 applying the consistency principle
D
depreciation would be $6000 applying the prudence principle
33 The financial statements of a business are prepared on the basis that it will continue to operate
for many years into the future.
Which accounting principle is being applied?
A
business entity
B
going concern
C
money measurement
D
realisation
34 When Marina opened a business she purchased a stapler for the office.
She recorded this as office expenses rather than as office equipment.
Which accounting principle did Marina apply?
A
consistency
B
historic cost
C
materiality
D
prudence
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
[Turn over
14
35 What is not an aim of international accounting standards?
A
to ensure accounting standards in different countries agree
B
to establish an organisation to set standards in every country
C
to make it easier to compare companies’ financial statements
D
to reduce the variety of accounting practices worldwide
© UCLES 2020
0452/13/O/N/20
*6889339018*
*0300798858*
*4973334389*
*8476545783*
Download